Patent Publication Number: US-2023135355-A1

Title: A control module having an actuator and adapted to be attached to a power adapter

Description:
PRIORITY 
     Applicant claims priority to U.S. application Ser. No. 17/976,847, filed Oct. 30, 2022, U.S. Application 63/414,022, filed Oct. 7, 2022, U.S. Application 63/397,853, filed Aug. 14, 2022, U.S. Application 63/351,397, filed Jun. 12, 2022, U.S. Application 63/295,808, filed Dec. 31, 2021, U.S. Application 63/275,584, filed Nov. 4, 2021, U.S. Application 63/275,420, filed Nov. 3, 2021, the entire applications of which are incorporated herein by reference. 
    
    
     TECHNICAL FIELD 
     An embodiment of the present invention relates generally to power adapters, and methods of implementing power adapters and control modules. 
     BACKGROUND 
     Power adapters, such as switches which control the application of power to a load (e.g., a light or other appliance), are an important part of any residential or commercial building and can provide beneficial control of a load attached to the power adapter, such as timing control, motion detection, and dimming for example. As power adapters continue to advance, additional functionality may be available to a user. However, replacing a power adapter can come with significant expense. In addition to the cost of the replacement power adapter, it may be necessary to pay for the professional installation of the replacement power adapter, such as in the case of an in-wall power adapter that is coupled to wires of a junction box in a wall of a building, such as a residential building or a commercial building, as will be described in reference to  FIG.  1   . For many homeowners who attempt to replace a power adapter rather than have an electrician replace the power adapter, the homeowner may face a risk of shock or other bodily harm during the installation process, or improperly install a power adapter that may pose a risk to a user of the power adapter in the future. 
     In the case of new construction, and particularly a new residential construction, a purchaser (or a builder in the case of a home that is built without input from a purchaser of the home) may not know where the different types of power adapters should be initially placed. Further, it may not be until after living in the home for a period of time that a homeowner may have a better idea where certain types of power adapters should be placed. The homeowner would then have to change some power adapters, and therefore incur additional time and effort (or incur additional time and cost if the homeowner relies upon an electrician) to change the power adapters. Such a need to change power adapters may be particularly frustrating for the homeowner, who, having spent money in the purchase of the new home and spent considerable time during the planning and move-in process, may now have to spend additional money and time to fix a problem. That is, a homeowner may not appreciate the additional cost and time to make improvements to a home that they may have already invested considerable money and time in planning. While the homeowner may decide to delay any changes of power adapters in their home to avoid the additional cost and time, such a delay may lead to dissatisfaction with their homebuilder or the purchase of their new home. 
     In addition to the inconvenience of having to change switches and outlets with ones that have different features, homeowners want to have a variety of options available to them. However, such a variety may result in manufacturers or distributors having to maintain a large inventory of devices. Such an inventory can be costly to the manufacturer, the distributors, and even home builders. Such costs can lead to reduced options in the market, and dissatisfied homeowners. That is, many homeowners may not be able to install devices that they wish to install. 
     Further, 3-way power control arrangements, 4-way power control arrangements, or other multi-switch power control arrangements are commonly used in both residential and commercial buildings. Multi-switching arrangements, such as 3-way or 4-way switching arrangements, provide additional challenges in terms of inventory for manufacturers, distributors and builders, and flexibility for homeowners to install different features in switch locations. In a 3-way or 4-way power control arrangement, it is necessary for a switch in any location of the 3-way or 4-way power control arrangement to control the application of power to a load. Conventional switches in 3-way power control arrangement may be the same devices that are designed for 3-way switching. However, the use of the same type of switch in a 3-way switching arrangement may limit the functionality of the 3-way switching arrangement. In a 4-way switching arrangement, a dedicated 4-way switch used as the middle switch in the arrangement may be different than the 3-way switches used in the other locations. However, the dedicated 4-way switching device having a double pole, double throw switch may have limited capability. 
     In multi-switch power control arrangements having different types of switches that communicate over a traveler line between the switches, different switches may be required, which may restrict the functionality of the switches in the power control arrangement. For example, in a 3-way power control arrangement, different types of switches may be implemented on the load side and the line side of the 3-way power control arrangement, where one of the switches may operate as a master switch for example. Such an arrangement requires the stocking of different types of switching devices and the placement of the correct type of the switching devices during construction of the commercial or residential facility, with little flexibility for the user of the device. 
     Accordingly, circuits, devices, arrangements and methods that enable a user such as a homeowner or other building owner to easily and efficiently implement different power adapters are beneficial. 
     SUMMARY 
     A control module adapted to be attached to a power adapter is described. The control module comprises a plurality of contact elements including a first contact element adapted to receive a line voltage and a second contact element adapted to receive a reference voltage; a first actuator extending from a housing of the control module and adapted to engage with a connector of a power adapter; a second actuator extending from the housing of the control module and adapted to engage with a tamper resistance element of a power adapter; a control circuit adapted to generate a signal; and a third contact element coupled to the control circuit; wherein the control circuit generates to the signal adapted to be routed to the power adapter by way of the third contact element to detect a change in a state of a switch of a power adapter. 
     Another control module adapted to be attached to a power adapter may comprise a plurality of contact elements including a first contact element adapted to receive a line voltage and a second contact element adapted to receive a reference voltage; a first actuator extending from a housing of the control module and adapted to engage with a first connector of a power adapter; a second actuator associated with the housing of the control module, wherein the second actuator is adapted to engage with a second connector of the power adapter; a third actuator extending from the housing of the control module and adapted to engage with a tamper resistance element of a power adapter; a control circuit adapted to generate a signal adapted to be routed to the power adapter; and a third contact element coupled to the control circuit; wherein the control circuit provides to the signal to the third contact element to detect a change of the state of a switch of a power adapter. 
     A method of implementing a control module adapted to be attached to a power adapter is also described. The control module comprises providing a plurality of contact elements including a first contact element adapted to receive a line voltage and a second contact element adapted to receive a reference voltage; providing a first actuator extending from a housing of the control module and adapted to engage with a connector of a power adapter; engaging with a tamper resistance element of a power adapter by way of a second actuator extending from the housing of the control module when the control module is inserted into a power adapter; providing a control circuit adapted to generate a signal; coupling a third contact element to the control circuit; generating a signal adapted to be routed to a power adapter by way of the third contact element; and detecting a change in a state of a switch of a power adapter. 
    
    
     
       BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS 
         FIG.  1    is a block diagram of a system for controlling the application of power to various loads. 
         FIG.  2    is a block diagram of a control module that can be used with a variety of power adapters. 
         FIG.  3    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a single pole, single throw (SPST) switch, wherein an enlarged portion of a contact element interface is shown. 
         FIG.  4    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter with a SPST and a control module having a DC circuit. 
         FIG.  5    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter with a SPST switch and a control module with switching control. 
         FIG.  6    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a single pole, double throw (SPDT) switch, wherein an enlarged portion of a contact element interface is shown. 
         FIG.  7    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter having a single pole, double throw switch and a standard dimmer control module. 
         FIG.  8    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter having a single pole, double throw switch and a wirelessly controlled switch control module. 
         FIG.  9    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter comprising a single pole double throw switch and a dimmer control module. 
         FIG.  10    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter comprising a single pole, double throw switch and a control module having a DC circuit. 
         FIG.  11    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter comprising a switch and a control module comprising a wirelessly controlled switch and having a DC circuit. 
         FIG.  12    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter comprising a single pole, double throw switch and a control module having an outlet. 
         FIG.  13    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having power adapter comprising a single pole, double throw switch and a control module having an outlet and a DC circuit. 
         FIG.  14    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having power adapter comprising a single pole, double throw switch and a control module having a wirelessly controlled outlet. 
         FIG.  15    is a block diagram showing an example of an implementation of the control module of  FIG.  14   . 
         FIG.  16    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter comprising a single pole, double throw switch and a control module comprising a wirelessly controlled switch and having a motion sensor. 
         FIG.  17    is a block diagram showing an example of an implementation of the control module of  FIG.  16   . 
         FIG.  18    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement having a standard control module and a second power adapter arrangement having a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  19    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement having a control module comprising a standard dimmer circuit and a second power adapter arrangement having a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  20    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement having a standard control module and a second power adapter arrangement having a control module comprising a standard dimmer wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  21    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement having a control module having a DC circuit and a second power adapter arrangement having a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  22    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement having a control module with a wirelessly controlled switch and a second power adapter arrangement having a control module with a remote dimmer wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  23    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement having a control module with a remote dimmer and a second power adapter arrangement having a control module with a wirelessly controlled switch wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  24    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a standard control module and a second power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled switch wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  25    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled dimmer and a second power adapter arrangement having wireless signaling wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  26    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled dimmer and a second power adapter arrangement having a remote dimmer receiving line power and wired signaling wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  27    is another block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a remote switch having wired control and a second power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled dimmer wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  28    is another block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having wireless control and a second power adapter arrangement with control module having a wirelessly controlled dimmer wired in a 3-way switching configuration and signaling on a traveler line. 
         FIG.  29    is a block diagram of a control module having a wirelessly controlled dimmer circuit. 
         FIG.  30    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement wired in a 4-way circuit. 
         FIG.  31    is another block diagram of a power adapter arrangement wired in a 4-way circuit. 
         FIG.  32    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having an outlet and a second power adapter arrangement having a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  33    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a controlled outlet and a second power adapter arrangement having a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  34    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a circuit requiring a DC voltage and a second power adapter arrangement having a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  35    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement having a standard control module and a second power adapter arrangement having a control module comprising a wirelessly controlled switch wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  36    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled switch and a second power adapter arrangement having a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  37    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with control module having a wirelessly controlled switch and a second power adapter arrangement having a control module having a wirelessly controlled switch wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  38    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter having an outlet and a basic outlet control module. 
         FIG.  39    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter comprising an outlet and a wirelessly controlled outlet control module. 
         FIG.  40    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter having outlet and a control module having A DC circuit. 
         FIG.  41    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having an outlet and a second power adapter arrangement having a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  42    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a controlled outlet and a second power adapter arrangement having a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  43    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a test module. 
         FIG.  44    is a block diagram of first and second power adapter arrangements each having test modules and wired in a 3-way circuit. 
         FIG.  45    is another block diagram of first and second power adapter arrangements each having test modules and wired in a 3-way circuit. 
         FIG.  46    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter comprising an outlet and a standard outlet control module. 
         FIG.  47    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a SPST switch and a standard SPST switch control module. 
         FIG.  48    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a SPDT switch and a standard SPDT switch control module. 
         FIG.  49    is a block diagram of a control module having a controlled outlet. 
         FIG.  50    is a block diagram of a control module having a wirelessly controlled outlet. 
         FIG.  51    is a block diagram showing an operation of a control module for controlling switching on a line side of a 3-way switch. 
         FIG.  52    is a block diagram showing an operation of the control module of  FIG.  51    on a load side of a 3-way switch. 
         FIG.  53    is a block diagram of the control module of  FIG.  51   , but having a single power supply. 
         FIG.  54    is another block diagram showing an operation of a control module for controlling switching on a line side of a 3-way switch. 
         FIG.  55    is another block diagram showing an operation of the control module of  FIG.  54    on a load side of a 3-way switch. 
         FIG.  56    is another block diagram of the control module of  FIG.  54   , but having a single power supply and a single line detection circuit. 
         FIG.  57    is a block diagram of a switching circuit for implementing a switching operation in the control modules of  FIGS.  53  and  56   . 
         FIG.  58    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled switch and a second power adapter arrangement with a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  59    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled switch and a second power adapter arrangement with a control module having a DC circuit wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  60    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a standard control module and a second power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled switch wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  61    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a standard control module having a DC circuit and a second power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled switch wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  62    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a standard control module having a DC circuit and a second power adapter arrangement with a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  63    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a standard control module and a second power adapter arrangement with a standard control module having a DC circuit wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  64    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled switch and a second power adapter arrangement with a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  65    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a standard control module and a second power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled switch wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  66    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled outlet and a second power adapter arrangement with a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  67    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a standard control module and a second power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled outlet wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  68    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled outlet and USB and a second power adapter arrangement with a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  69    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a standard control module and a second power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled outlet and USB wired in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  70    is a block diagram of power adapter arrangements wired in a 4-way circuit. 
         FIG.  71    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having separate line and load contact elements and a standard control module. 
         FIG.  72    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having separate line and load contact elements and a control module having standard dimmer circuit. 
         FIG.  73    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having separate line and load contact elements and a control module with a wirelessly controlled dimmer. 
         FIG.  74    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a standard control module and a second power adapter arrangement with a standard control module in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  75    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having dimmer circuit and a second power adapter arrangement with a standard control module in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  76    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled dimmer and a second power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled dimmer in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  77    is a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a remote dimmer control module and a second power adapter arrangement with a wirelessly controlled dimmer control module in a 3-way switching configuration. 
         FIG.  78    is a block diagram of a switching arrangement having a base and standard SPST control module. 
         FIG.  79    is a block diagram of a switching arrangement having a base for 3-way wiring and a standard SPST control module. 
         FIG.  80    is a block diagram of a switching arrangement having a base for 3-way wiring and a control module with an SPST switch and a dimmer circuit. 
         FIG.  81    is a block diagram of a switching arrangement having a base for 3-way wiring and a control module with a wirelessly controlled SPDT switch. 
         FIG.  82    is a block diagram of a switching arrangement having a base for 3-way wiring and a control module with a SPST switch and a line detection circuit. 
         FIG.  83    is a block diagram of a switching arrangement having a base for 3-way wiring and a control module with an outlet and a line detection circuit. 
         FIG.  84    is a block diagram of a switching arrangement having a base with a control module with a simple dimmer in a first power adapter and a base with a standard SPDT control module. 
         FIG.  85    is a block diagram of switching arrangement having a base with a simple dimmer and a base with a standard SPDT control module. 
         FIG.  86    is a block diagram of a switching arrangement having a base with a wirelessly controlled switch and a base with a standard SPDT control module. 
         FIG.  87    is a block diagram of a switching arrangement having a base with a control module with a controlled outlet and a base with a standard SPDT control module. 
         FIG.  88    is a block diagram of a power adapter configured to operate without a control module. 
         FIG.  89    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a control module for controlling the application of power to a load. 
         FIG.  90    is another block diagram of a power adapter configured to operate without a control module. 
         FIG.  91    is another block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a control module for controlling the application of power to a load. 
         FIG.  92    is a diagram of a connector adapted to break a connection in a power adapter having a switch. 
         FIG.  93    is a diagram of another connector adapted to break a connection in a power adapter having a switch. 
         FIG.  94    is a diagram of an arrangement of contact elements of a plurality of contact elements. 
         FIG.  95    is a diagram of an arrangement of receptacle contact elements for receiving a corresponding contact elements and elements for breaking a contact. 
         FIG.  96    is a diagram of another arrangement of receptacle contact elements for receiving a corresponding contact elements and elements for breaking a contact. 
         FIG.  97    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter comprising an outlet and a standard control module. 
         FIG.  98    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter comprising an outlet and a standard outlet module. 
         FIG.  99    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter comprising an outlet and a module having a USB connector. 
         FIG.  100    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter comprising an outlet and a module having a controlled outlet. 
         FIG.  101    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter having a switch and a standard module. 
         FIG.  102    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter having a switch and a module having an outlet. 
         FIG.  103    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter having a switch and a module having a USB connector. 
         FIG.  104    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter having a switch and a control module having a controlled outlet. 
         FIG.  105    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter having a switch and a control module having a circuit for dimming. 
         FIG.  106    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter having a switch and a module having a module having a motion sensor. 
         FIG.  107    is a block diagram of a multi-way power adapter configuration having a load-side power adapter and one or more companion power adapters. 
         FIG.  108    is a block diagram of a multi-way switching configuration having a load-side power adapter and a companion power adapter. 
         FIG.  109    is a block diagram showing the operation of the companion power adapter for sending a switching signal to the load side power adapter. 
         FIG.  110    is a block diagram showing the operation of the load side power adapter generating a switching signal. 
         FIG.  111    is a block diagram showing a power adapter that eliminates the need for a control module. 
         FIG.  112    is a block diagram showing a modification of a power adapter  11202  having a switch and a control module. 
         FIG.  113    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a switch and a control module having a switch and wireless control. 
         FIG.  114    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a switch and a control module having a dimmer circuit with wireless control. 
         FIG.  115    is a block diagram of a power adapter in a 3-way switching arrangement. 
         FIG.  116    is a block diagram of a power adapter having a dimming module in a 3-way switching arrangement. 
         FIG.  117    is a block diagram of a 3-way switching arrangement having a dimmer module on both a companion power adapter and the load side power adapter. 
         FIG.  118    is a block diagram of a 3-way switching arrangement having a wirelessly controlled switch module on a companion power adapter. 
         FIG.  119    is a block diagram of a 3-way switching arrangement having a wirelessly controlled switch module on a companion power adapter. 
         FIG.  120    is a block diagram of a 3-way switching arrangement having a dimmer circuit on a load side power adapter. 
         FIG.  121    is an expanded view showing a power adapter arrangement having a standard outlet control module and a wall plate. 
         FIG.  122    is an expanded view of a standard outlet control module. 
         FIG.  123    is an expanded view showing the back of a standard outlet control module of  FIG.  122    where a latch of the standard outlet control module is separated from the housing module. 
         FIG.  124    is an expanded view showing the back of the standard outlet control module of  FIGS.  122  and  123   . 
         FIG.  125    is an expanded view showing a power adapter having an outlet. 
         FIG.  126    is an expanded view showing a power adapter arrangement having a switch and a cover and a wall plate. 
         FIG.  127    is a rear view of the cover of  FIG.  126   . 
         FIG.  128    is a front perspective view of the power adapter having a switch of  FIG.  126   . 
         FIG.  129    is an expanded view of the power adapter of  FIG.  129   . 
         FIG.  130    is an expanded view of the contact arrangement  12910  of  FIG.  129   . 
         FIG.  131    is an expanded view another power adapter having a switch and a cover. 
         FIG.  132    is a perspective view showing the connector arrangement  13130  of the power adapter of  FIG.  131   . 
         FIG.  133    is an expanded view showing the connector arrangement  13130  of  FIG.  132   . 
         FIG.  134    is an expanded view showing another power adapter arrangement having a cover. 
         FIG.  135    is a perspective view of the front of 3 different types of control modules having different contact arrangements. 
         FIG.  136    is a perspective view of the back of the 3 different types of control modules of  FIG.  135   . 
         FIG.  137    is a perspective view of a power adapter arrangements having a thermal connection between the power adapter and the control module. 
         FIG.  138    is an expanded view of the control module  13702  as shown from the rear of the control module. 
         FIG.  139    is an expanded view of another control module  13900  from the front. 
         FIG.  140    is a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement having a control module that allows venting of heat to the front face. 
         FIG.  141    is an expanded view of the control module  14002 . 
         FIG.  142    is a front perspective view of a power adapter arrangement comprising a power adapter having an outlet and a control module having an outlet. 
         FIG.  143    is a front perspective view of a power adapter arrangement comprising a power adapter having a 20 ampere outlet. 
         FIG.  144    is a front perspective view of power adapter arrangement having a keying function. 
         FIG.  145    is a front perspective view of a power adapter arrangement including a power adapter having a 20 ampere outlet and having a keying function. 
         FIG.  146    is a front perspective view of another power adapter arrangement having a keying function. 
         FIG.  147    is a front perspective view of another power adapter arrangement including a power adapter having a 20 ampere outlet and having a keying function. 
         FIG.  148    is a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement having a ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) circuit in the power adapter. 
         FIG.  149    is a block diagram of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  148   . 
         FIG.  150    is a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement having a control module that comprises a GFCI circuit. 
         FIG.  151    is a block diagram of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  150   . 
         FIG.  152    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a standard outlet in the power adapter of  FIG.  150   . 
         FIG.  153    is a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having an arc fault interrupter circuit (AFCI). 
         FIG.  154    is a bock diagram of a power adapter arrangement where the control module has an arc fault interrupter circuit. 
         FIG.  155    is a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement having a control module having a data connection. 
         FIG.  156    is a perspective view of a power adapter having a power adapter comprising a data connection. 
         FIG.  157    is a perspective view of control module having a plurality of actuators for controlling a plurality of circuits. 
         FIG.  158    is a plan view showing an elimination of wiring associated with a switched outlet. 
         FIG.  159    is another plan view of showing an elimination of wiring associated with a switched outlet. 
         FIG.  160    is a plan view of showing an elimination of wiring associated with a 3-way switch. 
         FIG.  161    is a block diagram of dimmer having an extended dimming range. 
         FIG.  162    is a block diagram of a receiver circuit that could be used in power adapter having a switch. 
         FIG.  163    is another block diagram of a receiver circuit that could be implemented in power adapter having a switch. 
         FIG.  164    is a block diagram of a voltage regulator that could be implemented in a power adapter having a switch. 
         FIG.  165    is a block diagram of a control circuit and a relay circuit that could be implemented in a power adapter having a switch. 
         FIG.  166    is a block diagram of a power supply circuit. 
         FIG.  167    is a circuit diagram of the transistor circuit and voltage regulator of  FIG.  166   . 
         FIG.  168    is a block diagram of a transmitter circuit. 
         FIG.  169    is a timing diagram showing a signal transmitted by the transmitter circuit of  FIG.  168   . 
         FIG.  170    is a block diagram of a receiver circuit for receiving a signal. 
         FIG.  171    is a timing diagram showing a signal received by the receiver circuit of  FIG.  170   . 
         FIG.  172    is a perspective view of a latch element. 
         FIG.  173    is a perspective view of power adapter arrangement having the latch element of  FIG.  172   . 
         FIG.  174    is a perspective view of a latch element. 
         FIG.  175    is a perspective view of power adapter arrangement having the latch element of  FIG.  174   . 
         FIG.  176    is a perspective view of a latch element. 
         FIG.  177    is a perspective view of power adapter arrangement having the latch element of  FIG.  176   . 
         FIG.  178    is a perspective view of a latch element. 
         FIG.  179    is a perspective view of power adapter arrangement having the latch element of  FIG.  178   . 
         FIG.  180    is a perspective view of a latch element. 
         FIG.  181    is a perspective view of power adapter arrangement having the latch element of  FIG.  180   . 
         FIG.  182    is a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement. 
         FIG.  183    is a perspective view showing a control module separated from a power adapter of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  182   . 
         FIG.  184    is a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement. 
         FIG.  185    is a perspective view showing a control module separated from a power adapter of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  184   . 
         FIG.  186    is a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement comprising a power adapter having a projection for receiving contact element of the power adapter. 
         FIG.  187    is another perspective view of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  186   . 
         FIG.  188    is a perspective view showing the rear of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  186   . 
         FIG.  189    is a perspective view showing the rear of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  186    with the rear housing removed. 
         FIG.  190    is a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement having a control module with a removable control element. 
         FIG.  191    is a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement having a control module with a removable control element removed from a main body portion of the control module. 
         FIG.  192    is a perspective view of a cover having a spring-loaded latch element. 
         FIG.  193    is a perspective view showing components of the cover of  FIG.  192   . 
         FIG.  194    is a perspective view of another cover having another latch element. 
         FIG.  195    is a perspective view showing the components of the cover of  FIG.  194   . 
         FIG.  196    is a perspective view showing the inside of the cover of  FIG.  194   . 
         FIG.  197    is a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement having a rotating latch element. 
         FIG.  198    is a perspective view of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  197    having the control module removed. 
         FIG.  199    is a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement having a sliding latch elements. 
         FIG.  200    is a perspective view of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  199    having the control module removed. 
         FIG.  201    is a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement having a spring-loaded latch element. 
         FIG.  202    is a perspective view of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  201    having the control module removed. 
         FIG.  203    is a perspective view of the back of the control module of  FIG.  201   . 
         FIG.  204    is a perspective view of the power adapter of  FIG.  201   . 
         FIG.  205    is a perspective view of connectors of the power adapter of  FIG.  210   . 
         FIG.  206    is a perspective view of back of a control module having contact pads. 
         FIG.  207    is a perspective view of contact elements of a power adapter that are adapted to make an electrical connection to the contact pads of  FIG.  206   . 
         FIG.  208    is a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement having a pair of spring-loaded latch elements placed near the top of the control module. 
         FIG.  209    is a perspective view of the control module of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  208   . 
         FIG.  210    is a perspective view of the power adapter of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  208   . 
         FIG.  211    is a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement having a pair of spring-loaded latch elements placed near the bottom of the control module. 
         FIG.  212    is a perspective view of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  211    having the control module removed. 
         FIG.  213    is a perspective view of another power adapter arrangement having a pair of spring-loaded latch elements placed near the bottom of the control module. 
         FIG.  214    is a perspective view of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  211    having the control module removed. 
         FIG.  215    is a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter comprising an outlet. 
         FIG.  216    is a rear perspective view of a power adapter of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  215   . 
         FIG.  217    is a perspective view of contact elements in a housing having an outlet. 
         FIG.  218    is an expanded view of the elements of  FIG.  217   . 
         FIG.  219    is a perspective view of elements associated with an outlet of the power adapter of  FIG.  216   . 
         FIG.  220    is an expanded view of the elements associated with an outlet of  FIG.  219   . 
         FIG.  221    is a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter comprising a switch. 
         FIG.  222    is a rear perspective view of the power adapter of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  221   . 
         FIG.  223    is a perspective view of elements of a switch of the power adapter of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  221   . 
         FIG.  224    is an expanded view of the elements of a switch of the power adapter of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  221   . 
         FIG.  225    is a flow chart showing a method of detecting a change in a value provided by a remote control module in a 3-way switching operation. 
         FIG.  226    is a flow chart showing a method of changing values associated with the operation of a power adapter arrangement. 
         FIG.  227    is a flow chart showing a method of implementing control module in a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter comprising a switch. 
         FIG.  228    is a flow chart showing the routing of electrical signals having different voltages through a switch of a power adapter. 
         FIG.  229    is a flow chart showing a method of implementing actuators of a control module to break electrical connections in different types of power adapters. 
         FIG.  230    is a flow chart showing a method of breaking electrical connections associated with a power adapter based upon a type of power adapter arrangement. 
         FIG.  231    is a flow chart showing a method of bypassing a switch of a power adapter when using a control module that controls the switching of power to a load. 
         FIG.  232    is a flow chart showing a method of implementing active and passive control modules. 
         FIG.  233    is a flow chart showing a method of dimming power to a load in a multi-way dimming arrangement. 
         FIG.  234    is a flow chart showing a method of providing tamper resistance in a power adapter arrangement. 
         FIG.  235    is a flow chart showing a method of providing an electrical interface in a power adapter arrangement. 
         FIG.  236    is another flow chart showing a method of providing an electrical interface in a power adapter arrangement. 
         FIG.  237    is a flow chart showing a method of providing an electrical interface in a power adapter arrangement comprising a power adapter having a switch. 
         FIG.  238    is another flow chart showing a method of providing an electrical interface in a power adapter arrangement comprising a power adapter having a switch. 
         FIG.  239    is a flow chart showing a method of coupling elements of a power adapter arrangement. 
         FIG.  240    is another flow chart showing a method of coupling elements of a power adapter arrangement. 
         FIG.  241    is a flow chart showing a method of implementing a power adapter arrangement comprising an actuator. 
         FIG.  242    is another flow chart showing a method of providing an electrical interface in a power adapter arrangement comprising a power adapter having a switch. 
         FIG.  243    is a flow chart showing a method of attaching power adapter elements to create an electrical interface. 
         FIG.  244    is a flow chart showing a method of implementing first and second power adapter arrangements. 
         FIG.  245    is a flow chart showing a method of implementing an in-wall power adapter having a switch and a recess adapted to receive a control module. 
         FIG.  246    is a flow chart showing a method of implementing an in-wall power adapter adapted to receive a voltage. 
         FIG.  247    is a flow chart showing a method of configuring an in-wall power adapter to apply a voltage to a load. 
         FIG.  248    is a flow chart showing a method of implementing a control module adapted to be attached to a power adapter. 
         FIG.  249    is a flow chart showing another method of implementing a control module adapted to be attached to a power adapter. 
         FIG.  250    is a flow chart showing a method of attaching a control module to a power adapter. 
         FIG.  251    is a flow chart showing a method of routing signal in a 3-way power adapter arrangement. 
         FIG.  252    is a flow chart showing another method of routing signal in a 3-way power adapter arrangement. 
     
    
    
     DETAILED DESCRIPTION 
       FIG.  1    is a block diagram of a system for controlling the application of power to various loads. As shown in  FIG.  1   , a system  100  comprises a grouping  102  of power adapter arrangements, such as a residential or commercial building for example, having a plurality of power adapter arrangements. A first power adapter arrangement  104  comprises a power adapter  106  and a control module  108  shown below an outlet  109 . The control module  108  is removably attached a recess of the power adapter  106 , as shown by way of example for the power adapter arrangement  122 . A second power adapter arrangement  110  comprises a power adapter  112  and control module  114  comprising a switch. A third power adapter arrangement  116  comprises a power adapter  118  and a control module  120  comprising outlets. A fourth power adapter arrangement  122  comprises a power adapter  124  having a recess  125  adapted to receive a control module  126  below a switch  127 . Flanges are shown on the top and bottom of the power adapter arrangements, where the flanges enable the power adapter arrangements to be attached to a junction box in a residential or commercial building, for example. According to various implementations, in-wall power adapters are attached to junction boxes. 
     While the control modules provide different functionality, some may provide wireless functionality which enable communication with various elements of the grouping  102 . For example, a remote device  128 , such as a mobile device (e.g., a cell phone, tablet, or computer), may communicate with the power adapter  106  by way of a wireless connection  130 . The remote device  128  may also communicate with the power adapter arrangement  110  by way of a wireless connection  132 . Further, the remote device  128  may communicate with the power adapter  118  by way of a wireless connection  134 , and with a communication base  136 , such as a Wi-fi, Z-wave or Zigbee base for example, by way of a wireless connection  138 . The communication base may communicate with the power adapter arrangement  116  by way of a wireless connection  137 , enabling the remote device  128  to control the power adapter arrangement  116  through the communication base  136 . The remote device  128  may also communicate with wide area communication network  142 , such as a cellular telephone network or other wide area communication network. The remote device may communicate directly with the power adapter  124  by way of a wireless connection  144 , and indirectly with the power adapter arrangement  110  by way of the wireless connection  146 . 
     The wide area communication network  142  can also enable storage of data associated with the grouping  102  and remote control from additional remote locations. More particularly, a communication base  136  may communicate with a power adapter by way of a wireless connection  137  with a wider area network  142  by way of a wireless connection  148 . The wide area communication network  142  may also communicate with a remote computer  152 , shown as a cloud server for example. Another remote device  153 , which may be out of communication range of any of the power adapter arrangements or the communication base  136 , may communicate with another wide area communication network  154  by way of a wireless connection  156 , where the wide area communication network  154  may communicate with the remote computer  152  by way of the wireless connection  158 . The wide area communication network  154  may be a part of or separate from the wide area communication network  142 . While various wireless connections are shown, it should be understood that wired connections may also be used. 
     According to some implementations, control modules may be used in an appliance of the system  100 . That is, the control modules provide functionality that may be beneficial in devices other than switches and outlets and can be used in any type of appliance. The use of a control module in appliance enables a common platform for a wide variety of devices in a home, and therefore fully enables home automation on a single platform. A first appliance  160  comprises a control module  162  and is connected to the Remote device  128  by way of a wireless connection  164 . A second appliance  166  comprising a control module  168  is also coupled to the remote device  128  by way of a wireless connection  169  and is connected to the wide area communication network  142  by way of a wireless connection  170 . While two appliances are shown by way of example, it should be understood that any number of appliances could be used in the system. The two appliances are shown by way of example to show the different connections to a variety of elements of the system. An appliance outside of the grouping  102  may also be associated with this system and controlled by a remote device within or outside of the group in  102 . An appliance may be any type of device, including at least for example, kitchen appliances, laundry appliances, shade control, temperature control, etc. 
     A junction box  182  may be coupled to conduit  184  having wires  186  that may be used to provide power to the modular power adapter by way of a terminal portion of the wires  186  that extend into a recess  125  adapted to receive a power adapter, such as a modular power adapter. Flanges  183  receive a screw or other attachment element by way of a threaded portion  188  to enable attaching corresponding flanges of the power adapter to the flanges  183 , as shown by way of example with power adapter arrangement  110 . Junction boxes  182  are commonly installed in residential and commercial building, such as attached to a stud behind wall board material for example. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  2   , a block diagram of a control module  200  that can be used with a variety of power adapters is shown. More particularly, the control module  200  comprises in electrical interface  202  having a plurality of contact elements, including for example a first contact element  204  adapted to receive a ground voltage, a second contact element  206  adapted receive a neutral voltage, a third contact element  208  adapted to receive a first traveler line (Traveler 1) signal a fourth contact element adapted to receive a second traveler line (Traveler 2) signal  210 , and a fifth contact element adapted to receive a line voltage  212 . The electrical interface  202  also comprises contact elements associated with switching devices, shown here by way of example as a common switch (SWC) contact element  216 , a first switching (SW1) contact element  218 , and a second switching (SW2) contact element  220 . The control module may also comprise one or more Transformers to generate a DC voltage. For example, a first transformer  221  coupled through CB line input voltage they generate a first reference DC signal, while a second transformer  222  also coupled to the line voltage may generate a second reference DC signal. Both DC output signals of the Transformers  221  and  222  are coupled to a control circuit  223 . Dashed lines are shown to indicate that the control module  200  may be implemented with a variety of switching arrangements. It should be further understood that the electrical interface  202  is shown by way of example and can include contact element arrangements described in any of the implementations set forth below. 
     The controls circuit  223  may be coupled to a variety of devices that provide functionality to the control module  200 . For example, the control module may comprise one or more wireless communication circuits, shown by way of example here as wireless communication circuits  226  and  228 . It should be understood that the wireless communication circuits could implement any wireless signaling protocol. The control circuit may be coupled to a memory  230  for retaining any data or code necessary for implementing the control module, an oscillator  232 , and a test circuit  234 . It should be understood that any additional peripherals to the control circuit could be implemented. A user interface  236  could also be implemented and may comprise a plurality of input/output (I/O) circuits  238 , each of which may have an external interface (I/F)  240 . The control module  200  is provided by way of example to show some elements necessary for providing functionality to the control module. It should be understood that  FIG.  2    is shown by way of example, and may have fewer elements than are shown, or may include additional elements which may be disclosed for example in other control modules set forth below. 
     Electrical interfaces between power adapters and control modules may comprise a different number of contact elements. The different number of contact elements in electrical interfaces between power adapters and control modules may be beneficial for different reasons, as will be described in more detail below. Turning first to  FIG.  3   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  300  having a single pole, single throw (SPST) switch is shown, wherein an enlarged portion of a contact element interface is shown in the dashed circle. More particularly, a power adapter  302  is adapted to be coupled to a control module  304 . An electrical interface  606  comprising a first plurality of contact elements enables the electrical connection to electrical wires, such as wiring in a commercial or residential building that receives a source of power provided to the residential or commercial building and provides power to a load, such as a light bulb that is shown by way of example to represent a load receiving power. The electrical interface  606  comprises a first contact element  306 , which may be a load contact element, adapted to be coupled to the load, a second contact element  308 , which may be a neutral contact element, adapted to be coupled to a neutral wire which is associated with a neutral voltage to provide a return current path for the power adapter arrangement, a third contact element  310 , which may be a ground contact element, adapted to be coupled to a ground wire which is associated with a ground voltage (often referred to as earth ground (EGND)) to provide grounding for the power adapter and a control module coupled to the power adapter, and a fourth contact element  312 , which may be a line contact element, adapted to be coupled to a line wire in the junction box to receive a line voltage to enable the power adapter arrangement to provide power, such as by providing current, to a load  314 . The electrical interface  606  may be located on one or more external surface of the power adapter, as will be shown in  FIGS.  121 - 141    and  FIGS.  172 - 224   . It should also be understood that the electrical interface  606  comprises contact elements of a power adapter alone, a control module alone, or a combination of a power adapter and a control module. While the power adapter  302  is configured for a single switch control of power to the load, a power adapter may comprise contact elements that are adapted to be coupled to traveler lines extending between two power adapters, as will be described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  6   . According to some implementations, the traveler lines enable the transfer of communication signals between control modules, where the communication signals may comprise requests, commands, acknowledgement, status information, control signals, or any other information enabling a control module to operate in a multi-way wiring arrangement. The power adapter is configured to route signals (reference voltage signals such as a line voltage signal, a neutral voltage or a ground voltage) to an electrical interface  630  comprising a plurality of contact elements of the power adapter that are electrically coupled to a plurality of contact elements of a module, such as a control module. It should also be understood that the electrical interface  630  comprises contact elements of a power adapter alone, a control module alone, or a combination of a power adapter and a control module. According to various implementations, contact elements adapted to be electrically coupled to contact elements of a control module may be located within a recess of the power adapter. 
     The power adapter also comprises a switch  316  having a first terminal  318  and a second terminal  320 . SPST switches similar to switch  316  may be shown in other implementations below. The switch  316  may be adapted to route an electrical signal from the terminal  318  to the terminal  320  or from the terminal  320  to the terminal  318 . As will be described in more detail below, the first terminal  318  is adapted to receive the line voltage (or in some cases a low voltage signal) and the second contact element is adapted to route the line voltage (or a low voltage signal) by way of a conductor element  322  (e.g. a trace on a printed circuit board (PCB) or a metal conductor commonly used in switches and outlets) in response to a switching of the switching contact element  321 , which may be caused by the actuation of the  316  by a user of the power adapter (e.g. by way of an actuation of a switch actuator accessible the a user on the power adapter). The conductor element  322  may be coupled to a PCB  324  having contact element of an electrical interface  630  or may be directly connected to a contact element of the electrical interface  630  (e.g., an electrical conductor may extend from the terminal  320  to the contact element  333  of the electrical interface  630 ). Colors associated with contact elements are provided by way of example that may correspond to the common wire colors if the contact elements are implemented as wires extending from the housing and adapted to be coupled to wires  1801  of a junction box as shown below in  FIG.  18   , where the load wire may be a red wire, the neutral wire may be a white wire, the ground wire may be a neutral wire and the line wire may be a black wire. 
     The contact elements of the electrical interface  630  associated with the power adapter are adapted to be electrically connected to corresponding contact elements of a module, such as a control module. According to the example of  FIG.  3   , six contact elements of the electrical interface  630  are implemented on the power adapter and four corresponding contact elements are implemented on the control module. The control module  304  comprises a standard control module and has conductor elements  328  and  330  that route the line power through the switch as shown to provide the line power to the load. If the switching contact element  321  were moved to the no contact (NC) position, no power would be provided to the load  314 . The conductor elements  328  and  330  may be a part of a contact element interface  332 . For example, the conductor elements may comprise conductors that provide a direct connection between contact elements of the electrical interface  630 , or between the contact elements of the electrical interface  630  and circuit elements of the control module, including for example internal circuit elements of the control module and circuit elements and actuators that may be exposed to a user of the control module or provided on a user interface, as will be described in more detail below. That is, contact element interface  332  may comprise a printed circuit board, or may not be present as a circuit element and only be provided for purposes of labeling the conductor elements. For example, contact element interface  332  may be a PCB enabling the connection of the conductor element  328  to the contact elements  344  and  350  and enabling the connection of the conductor element  330  and the contact elements  346  and  348  by way of traces on the PCB, and may include other elements such as circuit components that enable functions of the control module. According to other implementations, the contact element interface  332  (of the control module  304  or any other control module set forth below) may be shown for the purpose of designating the name of the conductive element that extends between contact elements (e.g., the conductor element  330  extends between the contact element  346  and  348 , where no printed circuit board is used, but rather a connector, such as a stamped metal part providing a connection between contact elements  344  and  350  or contact elements  346  and  348 ). As will further be described in more detail below in reference to  FIG.  6   , additional contact elements may be implemented in the power adapter and in control modules to achieve 3-way switching. While PCBs are described, it should be understood that any type of circuit board for receiving electronic components and providing electrical connections between the components, conductors, connectors or contact elements of the circuit board could be implemented. 
     The expanded view of the electrical interface  630  shows the six contact elements of the power adapter, including a contact element  333  for a switch common terminal (SWC), a contact element  334  for a first switch terminal (SW1), a contact element  336  for a load connection (LOAD or LD), a contact element  338  for neutral (NEUT) connection, a contact element  340  for a ground (EGND) connection, and a contact element  342  for a line (LINE or LN) connection. As can be seen in  FIG.  3   , the contact elements  338  and  340  for neutral and ground are not coupled to a corresponding contact element of the control module because the control module  304  does not require those connections. The expanded view also shows the four contact elements of the control module. As will be described in more detail, additional contact element may be provided to both the power adapter and the control module to enable 3-way switching. 
     According to various implementations as will be described in more detail below, it may be necessary to understand whether a power adapter is wired to directly receive a line voltage or receive the line voltage by way of a traveler line, such as in a 3-way or 4-way switching arrangement. Accordingly, a line voltage indicator element  352  is provided to indicate that the power adapter  302  or  602  is coupled directly to the line voltage. The line voltage indicator element  352  may comprise a light emitting diode (LED) for example, where the LED would be lit all the time because the power adapter is installed where the line voltage would be continuously applied to the LINE or LN/LD contact element, such as in a conventional switch or on a line side of a 3-way switching arrangement (i.e., a side of a 3-way switching arrangement that receives the line voltage from a line source in the junction box other than from a traveler). However, if the power adapter having a switch is wired to the load side of a 3-way switching arrangement (i.e., the side of the 3-way switching arrangement providing power from the load side power adapter to the load), as will be described in more detail below, the line voltage would not be continuously applied to the LN/LD contact element, and the line voltage indicator element would not always indicate that a line voltage is present. Rather, the line voltage indicator element would toggle on and off with the state of the switch of the power adapter and the power applied to the load  314 . As will further be described in more detail below, a line voltage indicator element may also be implemented in a power adapter that is intended to be wired on the load side of a 3-way switching arrangement. The line voltage indicator element may comprise a red LED for example, where the user would see that the LED not only toggles state, but displays red light, indicating that the power adapter is on the load side of the 3-way switching arrangement. That is, according to some implementations, a separate model (e.g., a separate stock-keeping unit or SKU) would be used, where the power adapter for a load side power adapter wired in a 3-way wiring arrangement having a pair or traveler lines would have a red LED. 
     There are different categories of control modules based upon the routing of a power signal, such as a line voltage, including for example, switching control modules and passive control modules. A switching control module may include a switching element, which may be any type of switch for blocking or passing voltage or current, such as a relay or a TRIAC for example. The switching element may enable switching a 120V AC signal (or a signal that provide a lower voltage or a lower current generated by a dimmer circuit as will be described in more detail below) to a load. A switching control module in a power adapter configured in a 3-way or 4-way switching arrangement may detect a change in a current or voltage caused by a switching associated with a different power adapter (i.e., a detecting of a switching on the load side power adapter by the line side power adapter or vice versa). A switching control module may control the toggling of a line voltage or dimmed line voltage on traveler lines, often designated as Traveler 1 and Traveler 2 for example, of a multi-way switching arrangement (e.g., a 3-way or a 4-way switch). According to some implementations, a line detection circuit for a switching control module may detect a change in the current that is only a result of the switching of the switch on the power adapter, and not a current drawn by a DC circuit in a control module. 
     A passive control module draws current for powering a passive element, such as a discrete component such as an LED or an AC/DC circuit to generate a DC voltage for example but does not include a switching element that controls the toggling of a line voltage or dimmed line voltage on Traveler 1 and Traveler 2 to control the power to a load. The switching of the line voltage provided to a load or on traveler lines by a power adapter having a switch that is coupled to a passive control module is performed by the switch on the power adapter, where the line voltage may be routed to Traveler 1 or Traveler 2 through the passive control module. 
     The control modules may also be categorized depending upon how they manage power. Other than a standard outlet control module that provides fixed power to an outlet of the control module, but does not route power or otherwise provide power conversion, as shown in  FIGS.  46  and  121    for example, control modules may comprise power managing control modules, which may include (i) power routing control modules, (ii) power switching control modules (e.g., a control module having a timer, motion sensor, or wirelessly controlled outlet), and (iii) power conversion control module (e.g., a module having a USB connector or a night light). Power routing control modules may receive a power signal, such as the line voltage, from a power adapter and route the power signal back into the power adapter. According to some implementations, the power signal routed back into the power adapter may be an AC signal, or a DC signal. A power switching control module may provide a switching of a power signal (i.e., pass or block the power signal). A power switching control module may comprise any control module that includes a dimmer circuit, a motion detection circuit, or a timer circuit, for example. A power conversion control module may comprise a control circuit for converting power from one form of power to another. For example, a simple power conversion circuit may convert an AC line voltage to a light signal, such as by using an LED device. A power conversion circuit may convert an AC signal to a DC signal, such as to provide a DC voltage to enable the operation of internal circuits of the control module or to implement a connector accessible by a user of a power adapter arrangement (e.g., a USB connector for charging a portable device). A power conversion circuit may also convert an AC signal to another AC signal. It should be understood that a given power managing control module may fall into more than one of the three categories (i), (ii) and (iii) listed above. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  4   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  400  having a power adapter with a SPST switch and a control module having a DC circuit is shown. A control module  402  comprises a peripheral device  403  having an AC/DC circuit  404  for converting AC line voltage to a DC voltage, shown here by way of example as a +5 volt DC signal. While the peripheral device  403  is shown by way of example as an AC/DC circuit, it should be understood that the control module  402  may comprise any type of peripheral device that receives one or more reference voltages (e.g., line, neutral or ground). A DC circuit  406  is coupled to receive the DC signal. As will be described in more detail below, the DC circuit could include many types of circuits that could be implemented in a control module, whether standing alone as shown in  FIG.  4    or as a part of a control module that is involved, directly or indirectly with switching of power to a load, such as the DC circuit shown in the power adapter  3402  of  FIG.  34   . Examples of DC circuits that could be implemented in any power adapter include a Wi-Fi extender, Wi-Fi router a data transfer device, a charging circuit, a data processing device, or any sensor that may affect the effect of the power adapter, including for example a light sensor, motion sensor, camera, microphone, a thermometer, humidity sensor, air quality sensor, or any other sensor that could provide information to the control module. Further, it should be understood that features in one control module could be implemented in another control module. For example, a wireless communication circuit may be replaced with a sensor in control modules as set forth below. The control module comprises conductor elements  408  and  410  enabling routing the signals through the switch to the load to enable the normal operation of a switch. The conductor elements  408  and  410  may comprise jumpers and may be implemented for example as traces out of printed circuit board, or metal connectors between the contact elements of the control module. As will be described in more detail below, a power adapter having a switch can be implemented without a control module  402 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  5   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  500  having a power adapter with a SPST switch and a control module with switching control is shown. According to the implementation of  FIG.  5   , the control module  502  comprises an AC/DC circuit  404  and a DC circuit  406 . A switch control circuit  508  is coupled to receive the +5 volt DC signal, which is provided to the switch  316  on a conductor element  510  to detect a switching of the switch  316  by detecting the presence or absence of the +5 volt DC signal on the SW1 contact element and the conductor element  512 . The switch control circuit  508  controls the application of the line voltage to the load by way of the conductor element  514 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  6   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  600  having a single pole, double throw (SPDT) switch, wherein an enlarged portion of a contact element interface is shown. A SPDT switch is commonly used in 3-way switching arrangements and may be used in other implementations as shown below. The power adapter arrangement  600  is similar to the power adapter arrangement  300  but includes further contact elements to enable 3-way switching and other multi-device switching. More particularly, a power adapter  602  is adapted to be electrically coupled to a control module  604  and comprises an electrical interface  606  having contact elements adapted to be coupled to electrical wires, such as wiring in a commercial or residential building that receives a source of power provided to the residential or commercial building and provides power to a load, where the power is generally the current being routed through the load. In addition to the electrical contacts of electrical interface  606  of  FIG.  3   , the electrical interface  606  of  FIG.  6    includes contact elements for traveler lines, which may be implemented as wires between junction boxes, as will be described in more detail below. More particularly, the electrical interface  606  comprises a first contact element  607  adapted to be coupled to a ground wire, second contact element  608  adapted to be coupled to a neutral wire, third contact element  610  adapted to be coupled to a first traveler line (i.e., Traveler 2), fourth contact element  612  adapted to be coupled to a second traveler line (i.e., Traveler 1), and a fifth contact element  614  adapted to be coupled to a line wire to receive the line voltage. Power is provided to the load by way of one of the traveler lines depending upon whether the power adapter is provided on the line side or the load side of the 3-way switching arrangement, and how the power adapter is wired in the 3-way switching arrangement. It should be understood that the control module  604  may be implemented without the ground and neutral contact elements, depending upon factors such as various codes and the application of a power adapter using the control module  604 . 
     The use of the switch  620  enables 3-way switching and other multi-device switching. More particularly, switch  620  comprises a first contact terminal  622  adapted to receive the line power (or a DC voltage) coupled to one of a second terminal  624  or a third terminal  626 , depending upon the state of the switch. The switching of the switch will route the line power to the load by way of one of the traveler lines or be used to detect a change in the switch by detecting a change in a DC voltage (or other signal that may be different than a 120V AC line voltage signal) by a control circuit of the control module, as will be described in more detail below. 
     As is apparent from the electrical interface  630 , eight contact elements are provided on both the power adapter  602  and the control module  604 . More particularly, the power adapter  602  comprises eight contact elements, including a contact element  632  for a switch common terminal (SWC), a contact element  634  for a first switch terminal (SW2), a contact element  636  for a second switch terminal (SW1), a contact element  638  for a neutral (NEUT) connection, a contact element  640  for a ground (EGND) connection, a contact element  642  for a first traveler connection (i.e., contact element T2), a contact element  644  for a second traveler connection (i.e., the T1/LD contact element), and a contact element  646  for a line connection (i.e., LN/LD contact element). The contact element T1/LD may provide a signal to a traveler line or to a load by way of the contact element  612  depending on how the power adapter is wired for switching power to a load. 
     The control module comprises corresponding contact elements, including a contact element  650  for a switch common terminal (SWC), a contact element  652  for a first switch terminal (SW2), a contact element  654  for a second switch terminal (SW1), a contact element  656  for a ground (EGND) connection, a contact element  658  for a neutral (NEUT) connection, a contact element  660  for a first traveler connection (T2), a contact element  662  for a second traveler (T1/LD), and a contact element  664  for a line (LN/LD) connection. 
     The control module  604  is similar to the control module  304 , except that it includes an additional conductor element to enable 3-way switching. In addition to conductor element  666  (associated with SWC) and conductor element  668  (associated with SW2), the control module  604  comprises a conductor element  670  extending from the SW1 terminal to the T1/LD terminal. The switching of power to the load is apparent in  FIG.  6    and will be described in more detail below when the power adapter arrangement is implemented in a 3-way or other multi-way switching circuit. While a neutral or ground contact element is provided for the control module  604 , it should be understood that one or both of these signals may not be required for certain control modules, depending upon a variety of factors, including local or national electrical codes for example. Further, it should be understood that the power adapter  602  could be used as a SPST switch as shown in the implementations of  FIGS.  7 - 17   . 
     Various control modules could be implemented with the power adapter  602 , where the implementation of the control module may depend upon whether the control module is attached to a power adapter on a line side of a multi-way switching arrangement (or a power adapter wired as a SPST switch that is not electrically connected to another power adapter, as shown for example in  FIGS.  7 - 18   ). 
     Turning first to  FIG.  7   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  700  having a power adapter having a SPDT switch, and a standard dimmer control module is shown. The power adapter  602  is coupled to a control module  702  having a dimmer circuit  704  that provides dimming functionality for the load. More particularly, the dimmer circuit  704  comprises a variable resistor  706  that can be controlled by a user on a user interface of the control module. The variable resistor  706  is coupled between the SWC contact element and a first terminal of a capacitor  708  and a control terminal of a TRIAC  710 . The capacitor  708  is coupled between the control terminal of the TRIAC and the LN/LD contact element. The control module  702  comprises a dimmer circuit that does not require any power conversion. Rather, the control of the power provided to the load through the dimmer circuit can be controlled by a user through the variable resistor  706 , such as using a knob, or a sliding element as is commonly known. That is, the current passing through the control module  702  from the LN/LD contact element to the switch contact element is controlled by controlling the current through the TRIAC  710 . While  FIG.  7    shows one example of a simple dimmer circuit that could be used, it should be understood that other dimmer circuits could be employed, or additional components may be used to implement the dimming functionality. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  8   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  800  having a power adapter having a single pole, double throw switch and a wirelessly controlled switch control module is shown. According to the implementation of  FIG.  8   , a control module  802  provides the functionality of a switch that may be controlled by receiving signals from a remote device, such as a cell phone or computer for example. That is, in addition to the ability to control an on/off state of load controlled by the power adapter arrangement  800 , the control module  802  comprises an AC/DC circuit  804  to generate a DC signal, shown here by way of example as a 5 Volt DC signal. It should be understood that the AC/DC circuit  804  could generate additional voltages, or a voltage at a different level other than 5 volts. The DC signal can be used to provide power to any of the circuits of the control module  802 . That is, in this or other control modules having an AC/DC circuit, the DC signal may be provided to any circuits requiring the DC signal, in addition to those that are shown as receiving the DC signal. A control circuit  806  is coupled to the SW1 and SW2 contact elements associated with the switch to detect a change in the switch  620  of the power adapter  602 . The control circuit  806  or a control circuit in any other control module may be any type of control circuit, including a circuit implemented using discrete components, or an integrated circuit (IC), such as a processor circuit. By way of example, the control circuit  806  may provide a low voltage signal (e.g., 5 V) to the SWC contact element and detect a change in the signal detected on one of the SW1 or SW2 contact elements, which would indicate that a user has toggled the switch  620  of the power adapter  602 . A switch  814 , which may be a relay, a solid-state switch or some other switching device, is controlled by the control circuit  806 . It should be understood that a circuit for switching a line voltage signal (i.e., passing or blocking the line voltage signal) could be any type of switch for switching an AC voltage signal or both an AC or DC voltage signals, such as a relay, TRIAC or other solid-state switch. A wireless communication circuit  816 , shown here by way of example as a Wi-Fi/Bluetooth circuit, is also coupled to the control circuit to provide control signals to the control circuit. A transmitter/receiver (TX/RX) circuit  820  is also coupled to the T2 contact element and adapted to transmit or receive control signals for controlling the application of power to the load received over the traveler line on the T2 contact element. 
     In operation, the control module  802  can control the application of power to the load in three ways. In addition to detecting a change in the voltage on the SW1 or SW2 contact elements that is a result of a switching of the switch  620 , the control module  802  may also receive a wireless signal by way of the wireless communication circuit  816 . That is, a user may control the state of the power to a load in response to a signal received from the user by way of a wireless connection such as from a phone, computer or other remote device having a wireless connection, direct or indirect, with the wireless communication circuit  816 . The control module may also receive a signal from another power adapter on the contact element T2 by the TX/RX circuit  820 . In a single switching arrangement (i.e., a single switch controlling power to a load, and not a switch in a 3-way switching arrangement), the control module  802  may control the state of the relay, and therefore the application of power to the load by way of the switch  620 , or in response to a signal received by the wireless communication circuit  816 , both of which are controlled by the control circuit  806 . A user may also control the application of power to the load by way of a remote switch that sends a signal on the T2 contact element in a 3-way switching arrangement, as will be described in more detail below. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  9   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  900  having a power adapter comprising a single pole double throw switch and a dimmer control module is shown. A control module  902  of  FIG.  9    is similar to the control module  802 , except that the control module  902  includes additional functionality, such as a motion sensor and a dimmer circuit. More particularly, the control module  902  comprises an AC/DC circuit  904  that generates a DC voltage, as shown here by way of example is a 5 Volt DC voltage that is provided to the SWC contact element by way of a line  908 . A control circuit  906  is adapted to detect changes on a line  910  coupled to the SW2 contact element and a line  912  that is coupled to the SW1 contact element. A switch  914 , which may be a relay, a solid-state switch or some other switching device, is coupled to receive the line voltage by way of the LN/LD contact element, and is adapted to provide the line voltage to the T1/LD contact element. A dimmer circuit  916  is coupled between the switch  914  and the T1/LD contact element that is coupled to the load. The control circuit  906  may control the switch in response to a signal received by the wireless control circuit  918 , the TX/RX circuit  922 , or the motion sensor  924 . Accordingly, the control module  902  provides additional functionality of the motion sensor and the dimmer. However, it should be understood that a control module could be implemented with one of the motion sensors or the dimmer circuit according to various implementations. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  10   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  1000  having a power adapter comprising a single pole, double throw switch and a control module having a DC circuit is shown. A control module  1002  is similar to the implementation of the control module  402  but includes an additional connector to enable routing signals between the power adapter and the control module. More particularly, the control module  1002  comprises a first conductor element  1004  between the T1 contact element and SW1 contact element, a second conductor element  1006  between the T2 contact element and the SW2 contact element, and a third conductor element  1008  between the line LN contact element and the SWC contact element. That is, the control module  1002  is implemented to enable the operation of a single pole double throw switch by being adapted to route the line voltage to both the T1/LD and T2 contact elements. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  11   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  1100  having a power adapter comprising a single pole, double throw switch and a control module comprising a wirelessly controlled switch and having a DC circuit is shown. The control module  1102  comprises contact elements as shown that are part of the electrical interface  630  as described above in reference to  FIG.  6   . The control module  1102  comprises an AC/DC circuit  404  for generating a low voltage DC signal, shown here by way of example as a 5 Volt signal that is coupled to a control circuit  1106  and could be used by any other element of the control module necessary to receive the DC power. A switching element  1108 , which may be a relay, a solid-state switch or some other switching device, is used to control the application of the line voltage on the LN/LD contact element to the T1/LD contact element to provide power to the load  314 . The 5 Volt signal is also provided to the SWC contact element to route the 5 Volt signal through the switch and enable the control circuit to detect a change in the switch  620  on lines  1112  and  1114 . A DC circuit  406  is also coupled to the AC/DC circuit  404 . The control module may also comprise a wireless communication circuit  1118 , shown by way of example here as a Wi-Fi and Bluetooth wireless module. The control circuit may also be coupled to a motion sensor  1120 . As described above, the control circuit of the control module  1102  may control the application of power to the load by receiving a signal from the switch  620 , a wireless communication circuit  1118 , the motion sensor  1120 , or the TX/RX circuit  1122 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  12   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  1200  having a power adapter comprising a single pole, double throw switch and a control module having an outlet is shown. A control module  1202  not only routes the line voltage to the switch  620 , but also routes the line voltage to an outlet  1210 . More particularly, the control module  1202  comprises a first conductor element  1204  between the T1 contact element and SW1 contact element, a second conductor element  1206  between the T2 contact element and the SW2 contact element, and a third conductor element  1208  between the LN/LD contact element and the SWC contact element. The control module also comprises an outlet  1210  and is coupled to the line neutral and ground contact elements of the electrical interface  606  to provide the necessary voltages and current paths for implementing the outlet  1210 . The outlet may also comprise an indicator  1212 , indicating that power is applied to the outlet. The indicator  1212  may be, by way of example, a light emitting diode (LED). 
     Turning now to  FIG.  13   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  1300  having a power adapter comprising a single pole, double throw switch and a control module having an outlet and a DC circuit is shown. In addition to the elements of the control module  1202  of  FIG.  12   , the control module  1302  comprises an AC/DC circuit  404  generating a DC signal, shown here by way of example of as a 5 Volt DC signal. It should be understood that the DC circuit could be any type of circuit requiring DC power that is independent of the power adapter  602  or the outlet portion of the control module  1302 . By way of example, the control module  1302  could be a circuit for charging an external device, such as a USB charger, a white noise maker, a speaker, or a smart speaker. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  14   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  1400  having a power adapter comprising a single pole, double throw switch and a control module having a wirelessly controlled outlet is shown. The control module  1402 , in addition to the outlet elements of control module  1202 , comprises elements that enable wireless control of the power applied to the outlet  1210 . More particularly, the control module  1402  comprises an AC/DC circuit  1403  to generate a DC voltage to provide power to other elements of the circuit. A control circuit  1404  is coupled to control a switch  1406 . As can be seen, the switch is coupled between the line voltage applied to the LN/LD contact element and the line contact element of the outlet  1210 . That is, the outlet  1210  receives both neutral and ground voltages, but the power applied to the outlet  1210  is controlled by the switch  1406 . The control may be in response to a signal received by the wireless control circuit  1408  that is coupled to the control circuit  1404 . While the control is provided wirelessly, it should be understood that additional elements could be provided, such as a manual switch on a user interface of the control module  1402  enabling a user to manually control the power applied to the outlet  1210 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  15   , a block diagram showing an example of an implementation of the control module  1402  of  FIG.  14    is provided. A switching circuit  1502  may implement the control circuit  1404  and the wireless control circuit  1408 . More particularly, the switching circuit  1502  comprises a controller  1504 , shown here by way of example as a microcontroller and wireless communication circuit. The controller  1504  controls a relay controller  1506  that is coupled to control the switching of the switch  1406 , shown by way of example as a relay. The controller  1504  may also be coupled to a clock source  1507 , which may comprise an oscillator for example, and a memory  1508 . A status indicator  1510 , shown here by way of example as an LED, may also be coupled to the controller  1504 . While the switching circuit  1502  is shown by way of example, it should be understood that other circuits could be implemented to control the switch and control the power applied to the outlet  1210 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  16   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  1600  having a power adapter comprising a single pole, double throw switch and a control module comprising a wirelessly controlled switch and having a motion sensor is shown. The control module  1602  is configured to control the application of power to a load using a motion sensor. More particularly, an AC/DC circuit  1604  provides a DC signal used for the control module. The control circuit  1608  is coupled to the SW1 and SW2 contact elements to detect a change in a signal received from the switch  620  which receives the DC input signal. The control circuit  1608  is also coupled to a motion sensor  1610  and a wireless control circuit  1612 . The control circuit controls a switch  1614 , which may be a relay, a solid-state switch or some other switching device, for applying the line voltage received at the LN/LD contact element to the T1/LD contact element to apply power to the load. The LN/LD contact element may be coupled to the T2 contact element to route power to another power adapter when the control module  1602  is used in a 3-way switching arrangement, as will be described in more detail below. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  17   , a block diagram of an example of an implementation of the control module  1602  of  FIG.  16    is shown. More particularly, the control circuit  1608  comprises a microcontroller (MCU)  1702  coupled to a relay driver  1704  that controls the switch  1614 , shown by way of example as a relay. The microcontroller may also be coupled to other peripherals, including a memory  1706  and a clock source  1708 . A motion sensor controller  1710 , shown here by way of example as a passive infrared (PIR) sensor controller, is coupled to a sensor  1712 , shown by way of example as a PIR sensor. The sensitivity of the PIR controller may be controlled by a sensitivity input  1714 , which may be for example a potentiometer or other adjustable device available to a user. That is, the sensitivity of the sensor can be adjusted to control what types of motions may be detected by the sensor  1712 . Further, the amount of time that power is applied to the load in response to a detection by the sensor  1712  can be controlled by a “time on” input  1716 , shown here by way of example as a potentiometer. More particularly, the microcontroller  1702  may control the relay driver  1704  in response to a setting of the “time on” input by a user of the device. By way of example, power may be applied to the load for a selected period of minutes based upon a “time on” period input selected by the user. The microcontroller  1702  may also control the relay driver in response to a signal generated by a local switch sense circuit  1718 , which detects a change in the signal on one or both of the SW1 and SW2 contact elements. That is, as described above, when the DC voltage, shown here by way of example as VCC, is routed to the switch, the voltage on one or both of the SW1 and SW2 contact elements may change in response to a toggling of the switch, such as switch  620  of the power adapter  602 , by a user. While more detail of the control module  1602  is shown, it should be understood that additional circuits or different circuits could be implemented to provide in control module having motion sensor. The circuit elements of  FIG.  17    are provided by way of example. 
     Various implementations of multi-way switching arrangements, shown by way of example as 3-way switching arrangements, are shown in  FIGS.  18 - 29   . Turning first to  FIG.  18   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement having a standard control module and a second power adapter arrangement having a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching arrangement  1800  is shown. The control module  604 , which may be considered a standard control module, comprises the connections between various conductor elements  666 ,  668 , and  670 , as shown in  FIG.  6    for example. By implementing the control module  604  in both power adapters of the 3-way switch, a switch would operate as a standard 3-way switch. More particularly, the power adapter on the line side is adapted to receive the line voltage, while the power adapter on the load side is adapted to provide power to the load. That is, two traveler lines are wired between the line side power adapter on the left and the load side power adapter on the right. 
     By way of example, according to the configuration of the switch  620  in  FIG.  18   , a line voltage provided to the LN/LD contact element of the line side power adapter and routed through the control module  604  to the SWC contact element. The line voltage applied to the terminal  622  of the switch  620  is routed through the second terminal  624  and through the SW1 switch contact to the conductor element  670 , which routes the line voltage to the T1/LD contact element and the Traveler 1 as shown. The line voltage is received by the T1/LD contact element of the load side power adapter and is routed through the control module  604  to the SW1 contact element. Based upon the state of the switch  620 , the line voltage is routed through the second terminal  624  and the terminal  622  of the switch  620  of the load side power adapter  602 , and then routed to the SWC contact element of the electrical interface  630 . As can be seen, the line voltage will then be routed through the LN/LD contact element to the load  314  by way of the conductor  666  and the LN/LD contact element. Therefore, based upon the switching arrangements of the implementation of a 3-way switch in  FIG.  18    having the switches  620  in the configuration as shown, the line voltage will be applied to the load (i.e., the light will be on). The switching of either switch  620  will turn the light off, or when the light is off, the switching of either switch will turn the light back on. 
     The 3-way switching arrangement of  FIGS.  18 - 42    all have two traveler lines and operate based upon the same principle. That is, the switching of the switch  620  on either side of the 3-way switch will cause the state of the power applied to the load to toggle. According to the example of  FIG.  18   , a plurality of wires  1801  routed between the power adapter arrangements comprises Traveler 1, Traveler 2 and Neutral wires that may be routed, such as through conduit, between junction boxes having the power adapters. The operation of the 3-way switching arrangements may vary depending upon the control module used in the power adapters in the 3-way switching arrangement, as will be described in more detail below in reference to  FIGS.  19 - 42   . 
     Turning now to  FIGS.  19  and  20   , block diagrams of a power adapter arrangement having a control module comprising a standard dimmer circuit are shown. That is, a standard dimmer circuit enables a user to manually change the light level of a load using an actuator on a user interface, in contrast to a wirelessly controlled dimmer that sets a dimming level in response to a wireless communication signal and generally requires a conversion of the line voltage to a stable DC voltage that is used by components of the control module. According to the arrangement  1900  of power adapters of  FIG.  19   , the control module  702  provides a dimming function using the dimmer circuit  704  in the current path between the line contact element LN/LD and the switch  620 . In contrast, in the arrangement  2000  of power adapters of  FIG.  20   , the dimming functionality is provided between the switch  620 , through which the line voltage is routed, and the load by way of the LN/LD contact element. The implementations of  FIGS.  19  and  20    show the flexibility of a system for implementing control modules in power adapters of a 3-way lighting arrangement when using a dimmer that does not require any conversion of the line voltage to a stable DC voltage that is used by components of the control module. 
     Turning now to  FIGS.  21 - 29   , various examples of 3-way switching arrangements are shown. Referring first to  FIG.  21   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement having a control module comprising a DC circuit, shown here by way of example as a smart speaker and a second power adapter arrangement having a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration  2100  is shown. As shown in  FIG.  21   , the control module  2102  comprises an AC/DC circuit  2104 , a line detection circuit  2106  and a control circuit  2108 . The control circuit  2108  will control the state of a switch (SW)  2110 , which may be a relay, a solid-state switch or some other switching device. The control circuit may receive input from a wireless control circuit  2112  or a microphone  2114  and generate as output through a speaker  2116 . The control circuit will enable the operation of a smart speaker as is known in the art. While the elements of a smart speaker are shown by way of example in  FIG.  21   , it should be understood that the elements of a smart speaker could be used in other control modules set forth below. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  22   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement having a control module with a wirelessly controlled switch and a second power adapter arrangement having a control module with a remote dimmer wired in a 3-way switching configuration  2200  is shown. A control module  2202  is attached to a power adapter  602  on the line side of the 3-way switching arrangement, and a control module  2204  is attached to a power adapter  602  on the load side of the 3-way switching arrangement. By providing line power to both power adapters (i.e., through Traveler 2), no battery is required. The control module  2202  comprises an AC/DC circuit  2206  that generates a DC voltage used by circuit elements of the control module. A control circuit  2208  is coupled to control a switch  2210  which may be a relay, a solid-state switch or some other switching device, where the switching of the power to the load (by way of one of the two traveler lines) is controlled by the control module  2202 . The control circuit may detect a change in a voltage on a SW1 or SW2 contact element, which may be a 5 Volt signal provided to the switch  620  by the SWC contact element. The control circuit may also receive a signal by way of a wireless communication circuit  2212 , which is shown by way of example as a combined Wi-Fi and Bluetooth wireless communication circuit. The control module  2204  also comprises an AC/DC circuit  2214 , and includes a wireless communication circuit  2216 , which may also be a combined Wi-Fi and Bluetooth circuit. A user interface  2218 , which may enable dimming control on a surface of the control module, enables communication between the control modules  2202  and  2204 . 
     A description of the operation of the 3-way switching arrangement based upon the state of the switches of the switching arrangement as shown is now described. It should be noted that the LN/LD contact element is electrically connected to the T2 contact element of the power adapter on the line side of the 3-way power adapter arrangement to enable the line voltage to be routed over the Traveler 2 to the T2 contact element of the power adapter  602  on the load side of the 3-way circuit. Therefore, the control module  2204  will always receive power by way of the T2 contact element. A DC signal, shown by way of example as a 5 Volt signal, is provided to the SWC contact element to enable the detection of a toggling of the switch  620 . That is, a wireless communication circuit  2216 , shown by way of example as it combined Wi-Fi and Bluetooth wireless communication circuit, is configured to detect a switching of a voltage on the SW1 and SW2 contact elements. It should be understood that it may be possible to monitor only one of the two lines associated with the SW1 and SW2 contact elements to detect a change from 0 V (or a floating condition) to 5 V. A user interface  2218  is also provided to the wireless communication circuit. The wireless communication circuit  2216  can therefore receive a toggle input from the switch  620  or a dimmer control input from the user interface  2218 . The detection of the toggling by the switch  620  or a changing the dimming level on the user interface  2218  could be received by the wireless communication circuit  2212 . The control circuit  2208  would then change the state of the switch  2210 . If the control module attached to the power adapter on the line side comprises a dimmer circuit, the control circuit would also adjust the dimming level in response to the signal sent from the control module on the load side. While dimming control is the primary function of the control module  2204 , it should be understood that other input signals could be provided to the control module. 
     A description of the operation of the 3-way switching arrangement based upon the state of the switches of the switching arrangement of  FIG.  22    as shown is now described. The switching arrangement enables a user to change the state of the power applied to the load  314  using either switch  620  on the line side or the load side of the switching arrangement. More particularly, when the switch  620  on the line side is toggled by a user, the control circuit  2208  will detect the change on one or both of the SW1 and SW2 contact elements, and in turn change the state on the switch  2210 . When the switch  620  on the load side is toggled, a wireless signal is provided from the wireless communication circuit  2216  to the wireless communication circuit  2212  to enable the control circuit  2208  to change the state of the power applied to the load by way of the switch  2210 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  23   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement having a control module with a remote dimmer and a second power adapter arrangement having a control module with a wirelessly controlled switch wired in a 3-way switching configuration  2300  is shown. The implementation of the 3-way switching arrangement of  FIG.  23    is similar to that of  FIG.  22   , except that a control module  2302  attached to the power adapter on the line side and the control module  2304  attached to the power adapter on the load side have additional functionality, including for example motion detection. The control module  2302  comprises a motion sensor  2306  coupled to the control circuit  2208 . The control circuit will control the state of the switch  2210  in response to a detection of motion by the motion sensor  2306 . 
     The control module  2304  comprises an AC/DC circuit  2314  adapted to generate a DC signal, and a control circuit  2316  is coupled to detect a change in a signal on one or both of the SW1 and SW2 contact elements. The control circuit is coupled to a plurality of interfaces, including a motion detection circuit  2318 , a wireless communication circuit  2320 , and a user interface  2322 . The motion detection circuit may provide a signal to the control circuit in response to detection of motion. Similarly, the user interface  2322  may comprise a dimming controller, which may provide a dimming control signal to the control circuit in response to a dimming selection by a user of the user interface  2322 . The signals detected by the control circuit may then be transmitted by the wireless communication circuit  2320  to the wireless communication circuit  2212  of the control module  2302 . The operation of the 3-way switching arrangement of  FIG.  23    is similar to the 3-way switching arrangement of  FIG.  22   , except that motion sensors are provided. 
     While the control module  2302  comprises a switch  2210 , the control module  2302  and  2304  may be paired, where one control module act as a master so that a switch in only one of the control modules is controlling the application of power to the load. The pairing can be achieved by any pairing technique, including by way of user interfaces on the control modules, using an app on a remote control device, or automatically by a communication between the wireless communication circuits of the control modules. 
     Pairing can be performed in different ways. According to one implementation, auto-pairing can be performed using a number of steps, including a first step where a “new wirelessly controlled dimmer” may be placed on the wireless network that an original wirelessly controlled dimmer that it will be paired with is on (i.e., Wi-Fi, Z-Wave, Zigbee, Bluetooth). This step may be performed regardless of whether the new wirelessly controlled dimmer will be paired with another dimmer. In a second step, once the new wirelessly controlled dimmer is on the wireless network, it will send a signature signal (e.g., one of a limited number of signature signals) on one or both of the traveler lines that will be detected by the other dimmer. In a third step, any dimmer control module that detects a signature signal (which may be one or more dimmers) will send a “pairing request.” During a fourth step, for a certain period after sending the signature signal, the new wirelessly controlled dimmer will listen for the pairing request from the original dimmer. The pairing request may contain a signature that it provided on one of the traveler lines to ensure that the new wirelessly controlled dimmer knows that it is pairing with the original dimmer that received the signature that the new wirelessly controlled dimmer had sent. During a fifth step, the wirelessly controlled dimmer may send an acknowledge and complete the pairing process. During a sixth step, the new wirelessly controlled dimmer and the original wirelessly controlled dimmer will operate as master and slave control modules as described below. 
     According to other implementations, a signature signal could be sent. For example, the signal on the traveler line could be a toggling of the switch (3 times or 5 times for example). The signal on the traveler line could be a dimming sequence (e.g., toggle between 100% and 75% three times). The dimming sequence would not reduce the voltage so much that the other side would not have power, but enough to detect a signal, where preferably the dimming is something that the user will not easily see. According to a Master-Slave implementation, if the dimmer control module is in a SPST switch, it would never detect a signal with the signature signal and will not listen for a signal after the predetermined time. Also, the dimmer control module will always know if it is on the line side or the load side based upon whether adjusting the dimmer affects the current on the LN/LD contact element. According to a manual pairing implementation, there may also be a simple manual pairing option that a homeowner could use if necessary if the auto pairing fails. Pairing may be performed on an app. To implement simple pairing on an app, when a control module is inserted to perform wirelessly controlled dimming, it may be necessary to gain access to a network. When the network is identified, it is possible to pair the control modules in a variety of ways, such as “drag and drop” of a new control module having a dimmer control module on top of an existing dimmer control module or providing a control module with a name that would pair the control modules in the app. 
     According to some implementations, a connection button may be used with control modules having wireless capability. An LED (e.g., a green light) on the line side to help distinguish between control modules on the line side and on the control side. Control module pairs may have Bluetooth connections or a combination of Bluetooth and another wireless protocol (i.e., Wi-Fi/BT, Z-wave/BT, Zigbee/BT). Connection button on the line side enables establishing a Wi-Fi connection, for example by a press and hold of the connection button for 5 seconds. Connection buttons on the line side and load side can be used for pairing, including Bluetooth pairing. According to some implementations, only one person would be needed. For example, a user may press a connection button on the line side twice to start pairing (e.g., LED blinks orange), and press a connection button on load side twice to allow the load side to pair with line side. Pairing could also be performed for Wi-Fi pairing. Bluetooth pairing can be done many ways, and Bluetooth signaling for 3-way switching is very reliable. 
     According to some implementations, a universal dimmer could be provided. When a homeowner installs a dimmer switch, they might be using one type of bulb, but later may change to another type of bulb. The dimmer that is installed may not be optimal for the new type of bulb. As a result, the homeowner may have to replace the dimmer switch just to be able to use a different type of light bulb. Providing a control module having a universal dimmer switch that is designed to extend a wide range of dimming functionality (e.g., voltage and/or current requirements), an entire range or a large subset to limit the types of dimmer control modules that might need to be provided. 
     Control modules having a wide range of dimming functionality could be enabled based different hardware and software implementations. According to one hardware implementation, a control module having a dimmer may be designed for an entire range (voltage and/or current requirements), including LEDs, CFL, Fluorescent, MLVs, and forward/reverse phase dimming. A mechanical switch (e.g., sliding switch) on the wall switch or on the control module (such as the back of the module) may be provided to allow the selection of the type of bulb, such as one of the four types of bulbs. The control module will function in the correct dimming range based upon the selected bulb type. Therefore, only a single control module having a dimmer (or reduced number of control modules having a dimmer depending upon the ability to define ranges and dimming operation) will be needed for any dimming application. Rather than just selecting between two ranges, it would be possible to select a particular type of bulb. When selecting a particular type of bulb, it may also be possible to implement reverse phase dimming control (i.e., switch to a different dimming operation, and not just a dimming range) for that bulb. 
     According to one software implementation for providing a wide range in dimming capability in the control module, each control module having a dimmer circuit could be implemented with a Bluetooth circuit. The user could pair with the dimmer switch control module. A settings option on an app for interfacing with the control module could include “bulb type” (or some other designation that would indicate dimming range). Available bulb types or ranges could be updated using over-the-air (OTA) updates as different types of bulbs are developed. The dimmer would then automatically apply a certain dimming range that is appropriate for the bulb in response to the movement of the dimmer actuator. This software implementation may be included in place of a manual switch or could override a manual switch. 
     According to another software implementation, the dimmer control module may detect a range for the bulb(s) that are controlled by the dimmer module. When the control module is initially inserted, it could apply a range of voltage/current and decide what type of bulb is used and what the optimal range should be used. This could be implemented alone or in combination with a manual setting (i.e., a switch on the back or selection of a bulb type on an app). 
     In the examples of  FIGS.  21 - 23   , the switching of power to the load is performed by a switch, such as a relay, on the line side. In  FIGS.  24 - 25  and  27 - 28   , the switching of power to the load is performed by a switch, such as a relay, on the load side. Load side switching may require line detection of a switching on a line side power adapter by a load side switching control module based upon voltage detection on the contact T1 and T2 elements by the switching control module on the load side. When line power will be on either the T1 or T2 contact elements, it may only be necessary to detect a voltage change on one of the T1 or T2 contact elements. This voltage detection can be performed by circuits required for current detection when a switching control module is used on the line side. When a control module that performs switching is used on the line side, it is necessary to detect a change in current drawn on the LN/LD contact element due to a switching of the load side power adapter. Regardless of whether the switch that switches the power switches the line voltage to T2 or T1 contact elements, current due to powering the load will only be drawn on either T2 or T1 contact elements depending on whether the light is on or off. Examples of the switching of power on the load side is now described in reference to  FIGS.  24 - 25  and  27 - 28   . 
     Turning first to  FIG.  24   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a standard control module and a second power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled switch wired in a 3-way switching configuration  2400  is shown. The control module  604  enables the signals to be routed through the power adapter as described in  FIG.  18   . The control module  2402  is configured to control the switching of the power to the load on the load side of the 3-way switching arrangement. However, in order to switch the power on the load side control module, the control module  2402  may detect power on either one of the traveler lines on the T1/LD or T2 contact elements. That is, the line voltage provided to the power adapter  602  on the line side will be routed to one of the T1/LD or T2 contact elements. Therefore, it is possible for control module to tap the line power off one of those two lines, and to convert the AC voltage to a DC voltage as necessary to operate the control module  2402 . More particularly, a detection circuit (DC)  2404  is coupled to the T1 and T2 contact elements, where an output of that detection circuit is detected by the multiplexor/demultiplexer  2406 . A control circuit  2410  will control the multiplexer to select the output of the detection circuit and provide the output to an AC/DC circuit  2408 . The control circuit  2410  controls the operation of a switch  2412 , which may be a relay, a solid-state switch or some other switching device, which controls the application of the detected power signal to the LN/LD contact element, which is coupled to the load  314 . According to some implementations, the control module of  2402  may comprise additional elements, such as a motion sensor as shown in  FIG.  12   , or a dimmer circuit as shown in  FIG.  14    for example. 
     A description of the operation of the 3-way switching arrangement based upon the state of the switches of the switching arrangement as shown is now described. It should be noted that the control module  604  routes the signal selected by the switch  620  to the load side power adapter arrangement, wherein the control of the switching of the line power to the load is controlled by the control module  2402 . That is, in addition to detecting which of the traveler lines the power is on and using that line power to provide a DC voltage to the control module  2402 , the control circuit will not only detect a toggling of the switch  620  on the line side power adapter  602 , but also control the application of the power to the load by controlling switch  2412 . According to the implementation of  FIG.  24   , the control circuit  2410  may change the state of the switch, and therefore the application of the power to the load, in response to a toggling of the switch  620  of the power adapter on the line side, the toggling of the switch  620  of the power adapter on the load side, or in response to a signal received by way of the wireless communication circuit  2414 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  25   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled dimmer and a second power adapter arrangement having wireless signaling wired in a 3-way switching configuration  2500  is shown. According to the implementation of  FIG.  25   , fixed line power is provided using the Traveler 2. Switching is performed on the line side by the control module  2502 , where the switching may be initiated by a user interface on the load side. The control module  2502  comprises an AC/DC circuit  2504  to generate a DC voltage used by the control module. A control circuit  2506  is coupled to detected change in a signal on the SW1 and SW2 contact elements in response to a toggling of the switch  620  of the power adapter  602  on the line side. The control circuit controls a switch  2508  which controls the application of the line voltage to the Traveler T1 by way of the T1/LD contact element. The line voltage is then provided to the LN/LD contact element of the power adapter  602  on the load side, and therefore to the load. The control module  2502  also comprises a dimmer circuit  2510  to enable dimming of the load. The LN/LD contact element of the control module  2502  is electrically connected to the T2 contact element to enable the line power to be provided to the control module  2302 , as described above in reference to  FIG.  23   . The control module  2502  may also comprise a user interface  2512 , which may comprise a dimmer controller for example, and a wireless communication circuit  2514 , shown by way of example as a combine Wi-Fi and Bluetooth circuit, but could implement any communication protocol. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  26   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled dimmer and a second power adapter arrangement having a remote dimmer receiving line power and wired signaling wired in a 3-way switching configuration  2600  is shown. The control module  2602  is attached to the power adapter  602  on the line side and comprises a switch  2610  for controlling the switching of the power to the load over the Traveler T1, while a control module  2604  attached to the power adapter on the load side communicates with the control module  2602  on the line side by way of the Traveler 2. That is, both control modules receive power by way of the Traveler 2 and communicate over the wire between the T2 contact elements. As will be described in more detail below, the control modules may also communicate wirelessly. 
     The control module  2602  comprises in AC/DC circuit  2606  couple to the LN/LD contact element to receive the line voltage and generate a DC voltage signal. A control circuit  2608  is coupled to control a switch  2610  which may be a relay, a solid-state switch or some other switching device. A dimmer circuit  2612  is provided in line between the switch and the T1/LD contact element. A TX/RX circuit  2614  is also coupled to the control circuit and may receive a communication signal on the LN/LD contact element by way of a filter  2615 . That is, a filter is beneficial in blocking any extraneous noise or communication signals that may be associated with a different system. The control circuit  2608  may also be coupled to a variety of peripherals for receiving inputs. For example, a user interface  2616 , which may enable dimming control, may be provided. The control circuit may also receive signals by way of a wireless communication circuit  2618 . 
     The control module  2604  also comprises an AC/DC circuit  2620  coupled to receive the line voltage on the contact element T2 to generate a DC voltage. A control circuit  2622  is coupled to the SW1 and SW2 contact elements to detect a change in the switch  620 . The control circuit may also comprise peripheral circuits that are adapted to receive control signals. For example, the control module  2604  may comprise a TX/RX circuit  2624  that is adapted to receive a signal sent on the Traveler 2. A user interface  2626 , which may comprise a dimmer control interface, is also coupled to the control circuit  2622 . The control module  2604  may also comprise an optional wireless communication circuit  2628  for receiving commands by way of a wireless connection. 
     A description of the operation of the 3-way switching arrangement based upon the state of the switches of the switching arrangement as shown is now described. The control module  2602  controls the switching of the power to the load based upon signals or inputs received by the control module  2602  or the control module  2604 . By way of example, the control circuit  2608  may receive and input or signal at one of its circuits or may receive an input or signal by way of the TX/RX circuit  2614 . The switching of the switch  2610  will change the state of the line voltage signal applied to the Traveler 1, which is routed through the control module  2604  to the load, such as by a conductor element  2630  as shown. It should be understood that the control modules  2602  and  2604  may communicate over the Traveler 2 or directly by way of the wireless communication circuits to provide control of the switch  2610 , or other for other reasons, such as disabling one of the wireless communication circuits for example so that only a single wireless communication circuit in the power adapter arrangement is used. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  27   , another block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a remote switch having wired control and a second power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled dimmer wired in a 3-way switching configuration  2700  is shown. Unlike the implementation of  FIG.  26   , the power adapter arrangements in the 3-way switching arrangement do not communicate over a traveler line, but rather by way of wireless communication circuits of the control modules. More particularly, the control module  2702  comprises in AC/DC circuit  2705 . A control circuit  2706  is coupled to peripherals to control the switching and dimming of a load, including by way of a user interface  2708 , which may enable dimming control, and a wireless communication circuit  2710 . The control circuit detects a toggling of the switch  620  or a signal from the user interface  2708  and provides a signal to the wireless communication circuit  2710  to enable the control module  2704  to control the switching of the line power to the load. Accordingly, any control input received by the control module  2702  is provided to the control module  2704 . The line power is provided to the Traveler 1 by way of the T1/LD contact element and a conductor element  2711 . 
     The control module  2704  comprises an AC/DC circuit  2712  for generating a DC signal. A controls circuit  2714  is coupled to control a switch  2716 , which may be a relay for example. A dimmer circuit  2718  is coupled between the switch and the T1/LD contact element, where the output provided to the load is based upon the state of the dimmer circuit and the switch  2716  to the load. Therefore, the control of the power provided to the load is controlled by the control circuit  2714  in response to an input received by the control circuit  2714 , which may include signals received by the wireless communication circuit  2720  from the wireless communication circuit  2710  control module  2702 . As shown in  FIG.  27   , the second traveler line is not necessary in the implementation of  FIG.  27    because the communication between the control modules, including control signals provided from the control module  2702  to the control module  2704 , is performed wirelessly. Power is always provided to the power adapter  602  on the load side, and the application of power to the load is controlled by the control module  2704 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  28   , another block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module  2802  having wireless control and a second power adapter arrangement with a control module  2804  having a wirelessly controlled dimmer wired in a 3-way switching configuration  2800  and having signaling on a traveler line is shown. The 3-way arrangement comprises the transfer of the fixed line power on the Traveler 1 to provide power to the load side and wired signaling between the power adapters on the Traveler 2. Switching is performed on the load side. A control module  2802  comprises an AC/DC circuit  2806  and a control circuit  2808 . The control circuit  2808  is coupled to the SW1 and SW2 contact elements to detect a change in the signal routed through the switch  620 . A wireless communication circuit  2812  may be coupled to the control circuit  2808  to enable the transfer of signals by way of the TX/RX circuit  2810  on the Traveler 2 by way of the contact element T2. A user interface  2814  may also be provided to provide dimming control or other functionality. 
     The control module  2804  is coupled to receive the line voltage by way of the Traveler T1, where an AC/DC circuit  2816  receives the line voltage and generates a DC voltage. A control circuit  2818  is coupled to the SW1 and SW2 contact elements to detect a toggling of the switch  620 . A switch  2820  is controlled by the control circuit to controls the application of the line voltage received by way of the dimmer circuit  2822  to the load by way of the LN/LD contact element. As shown in  FIG.  28   , the switching is controlled by the control module  2804 , where the control may be in response to signals received either wirelessly or by way of the Traveler 2 on a TX/RX circuit  2824 . The control module  2804  may also comprise a wireless communication circuit  2826  that is coupled to the control circuit. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  29   , a block diagram of a control module  2804  having a wirelessly controlled dimmer circuit is shown. The control module  2804  comprises a microcontroller  2903 , which may include some or all the elements of the control circuit  2818  of  FIG.  28    and may comprise a microcontroller  2903  having a wireless communication circuit, shown here by way example is a Wi-Fi circuit. The microcontroller  2903  is coupled to a relay driver  2904  to control the switch  2820 , shown by way of example as a relay. A TRIAC driver  2906  is also coupled to the microcontroller  2903  and controls the dimmer circuit  2822 , shown by way of example as a TRIAC. While a TRIAC is shown by way of example, it should be understood that any type of dimmer circuit, such as a solid-state dimmer circuit could be used. The microcontroller  2903  is also coupled to a plurality of peripheral circuits, including a memory  2908 , a clock circuit  2910 , a dimmer control circuit  2912 , and a status circuit  2914 , shown here by way of example as an LED circuit. The dimmer control circuit  2912  may be accessible by a user to enable manual dimming of the power to the load at the control module  2804 . A local switch sense circuit  2916  is coupled to the SW1 and SW2 contact elements to detect a switching of a switch of the power adapter, such as switch  620 , where a signal is provided to the microcontroller  2903  in response to the detection of a toggling of the switch. A remote switch sense circuit  2918  may be used to detect a control signal on the contact element T2 and provide the control signal to the microcontroller  2903 . 
     While the multi-way switching arrangements of  FIGS.  18 - 29    are directed to 3-way switching arrangements,  FIGS.  30  and  31    describe 4-way switching arrangements, where a designated 4-way power adapter having a switch is implemented between the line side and the load side power adapters. Turning first to  FIG.  30   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement wired in a 4-way circuit  3000  is shown. According to the configuration of power adapter arrangements in  FIG.  30   , the switching of the power to the load is controlled by the control module in the first power adapter arrangement (i.e., the first power adapter coupled to receive the line voltage), shown by way of example as having the control module  2804 . Each of the second and third power adapter arrangements comprises a control module couple to receive or transmit control signals by way of the Traveler 2 or a wireless communication circuit. The control modules are shown by way of example as control module  2802 . It should be understood that other control modules could be used to transmit and receive signals with the control module  2804 . It should also be understood that any number of power adapter arrangements could be wired between the first power adapter arrangement receiving the line voltage and the last power adapter arrangement controlling the load. As can be seen in  FIG.  30   , the signal provided to the load is transferred by way of the traveler signals, where the control modules  2802  pass the line voltage (which may be altered by the dimmer circuit from the T1/LD contact element to the LN/LD contact element. The control modules  2802  do not control any switching of the load (other than changing of the state of the line voltage on the Traveler 1 or Traveler 2 in response to a switching of the switch  620 ) but provide wireless signals to the control module  2804 , which controls the application of power to the load using the switch of the control module  2804 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  31   , another block diagram of a power adapter arrangements wired in a 4-way circuit  3100  is shown. According to the configuration of power adapter arrangements of  FIG.  31   , the switching of the power to the load is controlled by a switch of the control module  2804  of the last power adapter arrangement coupled to the load. That is, the line power received by the power adapter  602  of the first power adapter arrangement is routed through each of the first two control modules  2802 . The application of the power to the load is controlled by the switch SW of the control module  2804 . The application of power to the load may be based upon a signal received or generated by either of the control modules  2802  in the first and second power adapter arrangements, or by a signal received by the control module  2804  of the last power adapter arrangement. It should be understood that the control modules may communicate and effectively establish a certain control module as a master control module if there are overlapping circuits, such as the wireless communication circuits. For example, the wireless communication circuits of the control modules  2802  may be disabled, and any wireless signals may only be received by the wireless communication circuit of the control module  2804 . Alternatively, the master control module  2804  may determine that signals received by a wireless communication circuit of a control module  2802  are redundant and ignore those signals. 
     Power adapters in 3-way switching arrangements having a control module having an outlet attached to one of power adapters are described in  FIGS.  32  and  33   . Turning first to  FIG.  32   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having an outlet and a second power adapter arrangement having a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration  3200  is shown. The control module  3202  comprises an outlet  3204  coupled to the line, neutral, and ground contact elements to provide power to a plug attached to the outlet. An indicator  3206  may be coupled to the line and neutral contact elements to indicate when power is applied to the outlet. Therefore, the outlet of the control module  3202  taps power off the LN contact element, but does not otherwise affect these switching of the 3-way switching arrangement shown in  FIG.  32   . That is, the 3-way switching operation is not impeded, but is performed as described above in reference to  FIG.  18   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  33   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a controlled outlet and a second power adapter arrangement having a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration  3300  is shown. The control module  3302  is similar to the control module  3202  except that the outlet is a controlled outlet. More particularly, the control module  3302  comprises an AC/DC circuit  3304  and a control circuit  3306 . The control circuit  3306  may control the application of the line voltage to the outlet  3310  using a switch  3308 , which may be a relay, a solid-state switch or some other switching device. The control circuit may be controlled by a signal received by a wireless communication circuit  3312 . 
     Power adapters implemented in a 3-way switching arrangement and having one or more control modules having wireless communication capability attached to power adapters are described in  FIGS.  34 - 37   . Turning first to  FIG.  34   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module comprising a circuit requiring a DC voltage and a second power adapter arrangement having a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration  3400  is shown. More particularly, an AC/DC circuit  3404  is coupled to the LN/LD contact element and generates a DC voltage, shown here by way of example as a 5 Volt DC voltage. A control circuit  3406  is couple to the SW1 and SW2 contact elements and detects a toggling of the switch  620  by the user by detecting a change of the 5 Volt DC signal on one of SW1 or SW2 contact elements. The control circuit will control the operation of switch  3410  to apply power to the load by way of Traveler 1 and the control module attached to the power adapter on the load side. A wireless communication circuit  3412  is provided on both the line side and the load side to enable communication between the control modules. As will be described in more detail below, the state of the switches will be controlled by the respective control circuits of the control modules to provide the correct on/off state of power to the load. The control module may also comprise a DC circuit  3414 , which may be associated with the user interface or provide external electrical connections, such as a USB connection for example. 
     A description of the operation of the 3-way switching arrangement based upon the state of the switches of the switching arrangement as shown is now described. It should be noted that a wireless connection between the wireless communication circuits  3412  of the control modules enable setting the switch to the correct state to either apply power to the load based on a current state and a selection of switch  620  of either power adapter. According to the state of the switches  620  and the switches  3410  on both sides of the power adapter arrangement, the state of the switches could be changed to change the state of the power to the load. Because both of the switches  3410  are open, power cannot be provided to the load. However, if one of the control circuit detects a change in the switch  620  on the load side for example, the control circuit  3406  on the line side would change the state of the switch on the line side, and provide a signal by way of a wireless connection to the control module on the load side of the switching arrangement, wherein the control circuit  3406  would cause the switch to close on the load side. Therefore, both switches would be closed, and power would be provided to the load. The control modules would communicate to know the state of the switches and control the switches to provide power to the load as needed. It should be noted that the Traveler 2 is not used in the 3-way arrangement, as the control modules  3402  do not have a contact element T2. 
     According to some implementations, one of the control modules may operate as a master control module, and the other control module may operate as a slave control module. For example, because the wireless communication circuits are shown as having both Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functionality, it may be possible for the master control module to receive communication signals from one wireless communication network, such as Wi-Fi for example, and communicate with the slave control by way of a second communication protocol or network, such as Bluetooth. A master control module may instruct the slave control module to ignore Wi-Fi communication, and only receive Bluetooth communication from the master device. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  35   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement having a standard control module and a second power adapter arrangement having a control module comprising a wirelessly controlled switch wired in a 3-way switching configuration  3500  is shown. According to the implementation of  FIG.  35   , a control module  604  simply routes the power through the switch  620  and onto one of the traveler lines, while the control module  3502  comprises a detector circuit (DC)  3504  to enable the detection of the line voltage. That is, the line voltage could be on either of the Traveler 1 or Traveler 2. The detector circuit  3504  is also coupled to the LN/LD contact element so that the control module  3502  could also be used on the line side, as described in reference to  FIG.  36   . The detector circuit  3504  generates a control signal provided to the control circuit indicating which contact element of the T2, T1/LD, or LN/LD contact elements is coupled to the line voltage. Outputs of the detector circuit  3504  are routed to a multiplexer (MUX)  3506  which is used to generate the line voltage at an output, where the line voltage is then routed by a demultiplexer (DEMUX)  3508  to provide the line voltage on or decouple the line voltage from the LN/LD contact element (to which the load is coupled), depending upon the desired state of providing power to the load. That is, if it is desired to place the line voltage on the load, the demultiplexer  3508  would route the output of the multiplexer to the LN/LD contact element, which is coupled to the load. An AC/DC converter  3510 , which receives the output of the multiplexer  3506  which has the line voltage, generates a DC voltage that may be used by other elements of the control module. A control circuit  3512  is coupled to the SW1 and SW2 contact elements to detect a change in the switch  620 . A wireless communication circuit  3514  may also be coupled to the control circuit to receive control signals that enabled the control signal to control the application of the line voltage to the load. 
     The operation of switching circuits comprising the detector circuit  3504 , the MUX  3506 , and the DEMUX  3508  will now be described. The detector circuit  3504  detects the presence of a line voltage on any of the T2, T1/LD, or LN/LD contact elements. While the control module  3502  may detect the presence of the line voltage on the LN/LD contact element when the control module  3502  is on the load side, it should be understood that the control circuit had selected the output of the multiplexer to place the line voltage on the LN/LD contact element. That is, any switching events associated with a switching of the switch  620  will be detected by a change of the line voltage on the T2 contact element or the T1/LD contact element, where an output of the DC circuit is provided to the control circuit  3512  indicating that a switching event has occurred on the switch  620  of the power adapter on the line side. The control circuit also controls the DEMUX  3508  to route the line voltage to the appropriate contact element. 
     A description of the operation of the 3-way switching arrangement based upon the state of the switches of the switching arrangement as shown is now described. A switching of the switch  620  on the line side power adapter is detected by the detector circuit  3504 , which generates an output signal to the control circuit indicating which of the T1/LD and T2 contact elements is receiving the line power. That is, one of Traveler 1 or Traveler 2 is receiving the line power. The control circuit will then change the state of the power to the load in response to the detection of a change of state of the line power on the T2 and T1/LD contact elements by controlling the demultiplexer to change the state the output of the demultiplexer having the line power. On the load side, the control circuit will detect a change in the switching of the switch  620  by detecting a change in the 5 Volt signal routed through the switch  620  on the SW1 and SW2 contact elements. The control circuit will then change the state of the output of the demultiplexer having the line power to change the state of the power to the load. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  36   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled switch and a second power adapter arrangement having a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration  3600  is shown. When the control module  3502  is placed on the line side as shown in  FIG.  36   , the detector circuit will always detect line voltage on the LN/LD contact element. The control circuit will switch the line power generated at the outputs of the demultiplexer whenever a switching of the switch  620  on the line side is detected, or if a wireless signal is received by the wireless communication circuit. Therefore, if the current state of the demultiplexer provides line power on Traveler 1, then the control circuit will instruct the multiplexer to change the line voltage to the Traveler 2. By changing the state of line on Traveler 1 and Traveler 2, the state of the application applied to the load will also change. On the load side, the state of the application of power to the load will change in response to a switching of the switch  620  on the load side. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  37   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with control module having a wirelessly controlled switch and a second power adapter arrangement having a control module having a wirelessly controlled switch wired in a 3-way switching configuration  3700  is shown. When the control module  3502  is attached to power adapters on both sides of the 3-way switch, the control modules can operate to change the state of the light to the load by changing the output of the demultiplexer. When the control module  3502  is attached to the line side, the detection circuit will continuously detect a line voltage on the LN/LD contact element, and therefore detect that it is connected to the power adapter on the line side. The control module can toggle an output of the demultiplexer to verify that it is on the line side. Similarly, the control module  3502  will detect a toggling of the line voltage on the LN/LD contact element when the control module is on the load side. The control module can toggle the output of the demultiplexer to verify that it is on the load side. During operation of the 3-way switching arrangement with both power adapters having the control module  3502 , each control module will switch the output of the demultiplexing circuit in response to the detection of a switching by the switch  620  of the control module to which it is attached. 
       FIGS.  38 - 40    are directed control modules that receive power from the power adapter  3802  having an outlet. That is, the control modules attached to the power adapter  3802  do not control the switching of any element in the power adapter, but rather taps off the line power to provide power to the control module. Turning first to  FIG.  38   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  3800  having a power adapter having an outlet and a basic outlet control module is shown. A power adapter  3802  comprises an electrical interface  606  having a plurality of contact elements adapted to be coupled to wires of a junction box, shown here by way of example as having line (LN) contact element  3806 , ground (EGND) contact element  3808  for making a connection to earth ground, a neutral (NEUT) contact element  3810 , and another line contact element  3812  for example. The two line contact elements  3806  and  3812  and will enable separately wiring the outlets, and particularly enable a switched outlet (e.g., the top outlet may be wired to and controlled by a wall switch). It should be noted that in the implementation of  FIG.  38    or any other implementation of a power adapter having an outlet that includes a separate line contact element, a separate neutral contact element, as shown here by way of example as a contact element  3807 , may be included. That is, a separate line contact element enables wiring the outlet of the power adapter as a switched outlet. A second neutral contact element may not be required if the line power is provided by the same power transmission system (i.e., line voltages having the same phase.) However, if the line voltages are provided by different power transmission systems, a second neutral contact would be necessary. That is, it would be necessary to wire one pair of a load contact element and a line contact element to one power transmission system, and wire a second pair of a load contact element and a line contact element to the other power transmission system. Accordingly, for any power adapter having an outlet that comprises two line inputs (i.e., a first contact element to the outlet of the base and a second contact element to a recess of the power adapter), then the power adapter may comprise separate neutral contact elements (i.e., a first contact element to the outlet of the base and a second contact element to a recess of the power adapter as shown for example in  FIGS.  121 - 125   ). As can be seen in  FIG.  38   , contact elements that are not coupled to corresponding contact elements of the power adapter  3802  are included with the basic outlet control module. As will be described in more detail below, the additional contact elements enable the use of the basic outlet control module in a power adapter having a switch. 
     According to the implementation of  FIG.  39   , the power adapter  3802  having an outlet  3814  is coupled to the control module  1402 . As can be seen in  FIG.  39   , the power adapter  3802  of the power adapter arrangement  3900  is also adapted to receive a control module having wirelessly switched outlet, such as the outlet of control module  1402 . According to the power adapter arrangement  4000  of  FIG.  40   , the power adapter  3802  is coupled to the control module  1002  having a DC circuit as shown. 
       FIGS.  41  and  42    show the use of outlets in power adapters configured in a 3-way switching arrangement on the line side of the 3-way switching arrangement. Turning first to  FIG.  41   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having an outlet and a second power adapter arrangement having a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching arrangement  4100  is shown. That is, the 3-way switching arrangement comprises a first power adapter  602  coupled to receive the line voltage at the LN/LD contact element of the electrical interface  606 , and a second power adapter  602  couple to provide power to the load, as described above in reference to  FIG.  18   . The control module  1202  having an outlet is attached to the power adapter  602  on the line side, and the outlet  1210  is electrically coupled to receive the line, neutral, and ground voltages as shown. 
     As shown in  FIG.  42   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a controlled outlet and a second power adapter arrangement having a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration  4200  is shown. A control module  4202  having an outlet that is wirelessly controlled is attached to the power adapter  602  on the line side of the 3-way switching arrangement. The control module  4202  comprises an outlet  4204  that is adapted to receive a switched power signal. More particularly, an AC/DC circuit  4206  is coupled to the LN/LD contact element to receive the line voltage and generate a DC voltage that is coupled to a control circuit  4208 . The control circuit is coupled to a switch  4210 , which routes the line voltage to the outlet  4204 . The switch  4210  can be any type of switch, including a relay, a TRIAC, or any type of switching element. The control module  4202  may also comprise a wireless communication circuit  4212 , which is coupled to the control circuit. The wireless communication circuit is adapted to receive communication signals for controlling the operation of the switch by way of the control circuit (i.e., to provide a wirelessly controlled outlet associated with a power adapter having a switch). It should be understood that the operation of the switching in the 3-way switching arrangement of  FIGS.  41  and  42    is as described above in reference to  FIG.  18   . 
     One beneficial aspect of the power adapter arrangements described above is that a test module can be implemented according to various implementations as described in reference to  FIGS.  43 - 45    to determine whether the power adapter is wired correctly in the junction box and whether the power adapter is defective. Turning first to  FIG.  43   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  4300  having a test module is shown. More particularly, a test module  4302  may be coupled to a power adapter to determine whether the power adapter is properly wired within a junction box. The test module  4302  comprises a test control circuit  4304  which is adapted to transmit and receive test signals. The test control circuit  4304  may be coupled to peripheral blocks, including a user interface  4306 , a display  4308 , and a wireless communication circuit  4310 . The user interface  4306  may provide simple feedback, such as an output on an LED indicating a pass fail, for example, or may include additional inputs that a user can select, such as a test button for example. The display  4308  may be included to provide additional information, such as to indicate that an error in wiring has occurred and provide an error type. The wireless communication circuit  4310  may be provided to receive communication signals associated with a test or transmit communication signals associated with test results to a remote location, such as a laptop or other portable device for example. 
     The test control circuit  4304  may provide test signals through the switch based upon inputs received at the test module. For example, a signal may be transmitted through the switch  620  and detected at one of the SW1 and SW2 contact elements. The test circuit may also detect the voltage on the LN/LD contact element, and, depending upon the position of the switch  620 , the voltage on T1/LD or T2 contact elements. The test control circuit  4304  may also test the ground and neutral voltages to determine whether they are properly connected. For example, the ground and neutral contact elements should be at different voltages. That is, although the voltages may be close, they should be different. The test control circuit  4304  should also determine whether the line voltage is the correct voltage. It should be understood that the test module  4302  could also be used on each end of a 3-way switch. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  44   , a block diagram of first and second power adapter arrangements each having test modules and wired in a 3-way circuit  4400  is shown. According to the implementation of  FIG.  44   , test modules  4402  and  4404  are coupled to power adapters on both sides of the 3-way switching arrangement as shown. The test modules  4402  are implemented to determine whether the power adapters are wired properly in the 3-way switching arrangement. Accordingly, a user may toggle the switch  4406 , where the toggling would be detected by the changing of the power applied to indicator elements, shown here by way of example as LEDs. That is, when the line voltage is initially applied to T1/LD contact element, the indicator element  4408  will provide an indication that the power is routed through Traveler 1, and when the line voltage is applied to T2, the indicator element  4410  will provide an indication that the power is routed through Traveler T2. 
     Test modules having additional functionality can also be provided. The block diagram of  FIG.  45    has a first power adapter arrangement having a test module  4502  and second power adapter arrangement having a test module  4504  which are wired in a 3-way arrangement  4500 . The test module  4502  comprises a test control circuit  4503  that may be coupled to a plurality of peripheral elements, including a user interface  4506 , a display  4508 , and a wireless communication circuit  4510 . The wireless communication circuit is shown by way of example as a combined Wi-Fi and Bluetooth communication circuit. However, it should be understood that the wireless communication circuit could implement any wireless protocol. The test module  4504  also comprises a test control circuit  4512  and may comprise a plurality of peripherals including a user interface  4514 , a display  4516 , and a wireless communication circuit  4518 , shown here by way of example as a Bluetooth wireless communication circuit. That is, it may not be necessary to have remote wireless communication with the test module  4504 , and only short-range communication circuit such as a Bluetooth connection would be necessary between the test modules  4502  and  4504 . While the test modules  4502  and  4504  are shown as a pair of different test modules, a single test module such as test module  4502  could be implemented according to another implementation, where one of the test modules may be designated as a master test module. 
     According to the implementation of  FIG.  45   , the test modules  4502  and  4504  are adapted to detect whether the power adapter  602  is working properly. That is, the test modules will determine whether a signal is being routed through the switch from the SWC contact element. A technician testing the power adapter may also switch the switches  620  to determine that these switches are working properly. For example, the test module on the line side for example can be the master test module and initiate a test to determine whether the traveler lines are wired properly. The test control circuit may apply a signal to one of the traveler lines, such as Traveler 2 for example, and the test module  4504  may detect a signal on the Traveler 2 line, indicating that the traveler line is wired properly. The test modules may also determine whether the line voltage is properly wired to the LN/LD contact element on the line side and the load  314  is wired to the LN/LD contact element on the load side. The various tests that are performed could be selected by a technician on the user interface of either test module  4502  or  4504 . Feedback related to tests that are performed or test results could be displayed on a display of either test module. The various tests could be selected by the technician on a remote device and provided to one or both of the test modules. The test could be provided remotely by way of a wireless connection such as a Wi-Fi connection or could be provided locally to one of the test modules by a short range connection, such as a Bluetooth connection or NFC connection. Tests could also be performed manually using the user interface. 
     As with any consumer product, it is beneficial to reduce the complexity of the product. For example, it may be beneficial to reduce the part count associated with the product, making manufacturing of the product simpler. According to the implementations of  FIGS.  46  and  47   , a simplified power adapter having an outlet and a simplified power adapter having a SPST switch are shown. Turning first to  FIG.  46   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  4600  having a power adapter  4602  comprising an outlet  4603  and a standard outlet control module  4604  having an outlet  4610  is shown. According to the implementation of  FIG.  46   , the contact element T2 of the power adapter is provided to allow a variety of control modules to be used in an outlet. For a control module that draws power off of either contact elements LN/LD or T2, a conductor element  4606  is provided to enable a control module to be able to draw power off of the contact element  4608  of the electrical interface  630 . That is, because a control module may not receive power from the LN/LD contact element in certain circumstances, it may be necessary to provide fixed power on the T2 contact element, as described in more detail below. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  47   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  4700  having a SPST switch and a standard SPST switch control module is shown. The power adapter  4702  having a SPST switch  316  comprises a conductor element  4704  to route the line power to the contact element  4706  of the electrical interface  630 . A control module  4708  comprises a first conductor element  4710  between the LN/LD contact element and the SWC contact element and a second conductor element  4712  between the SW1 contact element and the T1/LD contact element. Any control module that may require receiving line power at either the T1/LD or T2 contact elements will receive line power on the contact element  4706  regardless of this state of the switch  316 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  48   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  4800  having a switch  620  and a control module  604  is shown. As shown in  FIG.  48   , five contact elements are provided in the electrical interface  606  and eight contact elements are provided on the power adapter  602  for the electrical interface  630 . It should be noted that the control module  4802  comprises a reduced number of contact elements associated with the electrical interface  630 , where ground or neutral voltages may not be provided to the control module  4802 . 
     A line detection circuit (LDC), which may comprise one or both of a current detection circuit and a voltage detection circuit, where a voltage detection circuit may comprise an AD/DC circuit for example, may be provided according to various implementations. A line detection circuit may be implemented to detect a switching on a different switch in a multi-device switching circuit (e.g., 3-way switching). A switching control module in a 3-way or 4-way switch may need to detect a change in a current caused by a switching (e.g., a switching of the switch  620 ) on a different switch (i.e., a detecting of a switching on the load side power adapter by the line side control module or vice versa). A line detection circuit for a switching control module may have to detect a change in the current that is only a result of the switching of the switch on the power adapter, and not a current drawn by a DC circuit in the other control module. 
     While implementing a control module on the line side of a 3-way switching arrangement may not require complex circuits because the line power can be found on the LN/LD contact element, it is beneficial to provide control modules that may be implemented on either the line side or the load side of a multi-way switching arrangement.  FIGS.  49  and  50    disclose the use of a control module having an outlet with a power adapter on the load side. A block diagram of a control module  4902  having a controlled outlet is shown in  FIG.  49   . The control module  4902  comprises a control circuit  4904  adapted to control a switch  4906 , which may be a relay, a solid-state switch or some other switching device. A line detection circuit  4908  provides a signal, which indicates whether a power voltage signal (e.g., 120 volts) is on the T1/LD contact element, to the control circuit. The control circuit controls the application of power by way of a voltage buffer  4910  to an outlet  4912 . The voltage buffer may optionally be included to maintain the voltage at the output of the switch so that the outlet  4912  receives a constant 120 volts and may be implemented as a capacitor for example. 
     According to another implementation, the switch  4906  may be replaced by a make-before-break (MBB) circuit, alone or in combination with a switch  4924  comprising an MBB switch, shown in the power adapter arrangement  4900  on the right side of  FIG.  49    having control module  4920 . The switch  4924  holds the power signal on both the T2 and T1/LD contact elements to minimize any glitch of power to the outlet, where the only element of a loss of power to the outlet would be based upon the switch  4924 . Depending upon the delay, it may be necessary to maintain the voltage to the outlet  4922  at the output of the switch  4924  using a voltage buffer with the switch  4924  to ensure that any loss of power to the outlet is for a short enough period of time that a load applied to the outlet would not be affected. The switch  4924  could be controlled by an output of the voltage detector  4926 . By way of example, if a voltage is detected on the T2 line as shown, the switch would be switched to provide the power to the outlet  4922 , otherwise the switch  4924  would provide power by way of the T1/LD contact element to the outlet. An AC/DC circuit  4928  could also be provided to an outlet of the switch to generate a DC signal, such as a 5 V DC signal. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  50   , a block diagram of a control module  5002  having a wirelessly controlled outlet is shown. The control module  5002  comprises an outlet  5004  is controlled by a switch  5006  and a control circuit  5008  to control the application of power to the outlet  5004 . Because a 120 V power will be on either one of the traveler lines (i.e., a voltage received from the traveler lines at the T2 or T1/LD contact elements), a multiplexer circuit  5010  could be used to select the output of one of two AC/DC circuits  5012  and  5014  to generate a low voltage DC signal (e.g., 5 volts) that is provided to the control circuit  5008 . A voltage buffer  5016  may be used to maintain the power to the outlet  5004 . A wireless communication circuit  5018  may be implemented to provide a switching operation for the outlet (i.e., to implement a controlled outlet). That is, while in a power adapter having an outlet that has fixed power, the control circuit  5008  and the switch  5006  could be used to provide power to a controlled outlet, where power can be applied to the outlet as desired by a user, such as according to a timing pattern for example. 
     The control module  5002  may be modified to have a single AC/DC circuit, rather than two AC/DC circuits as shown on the left side of  FIG.  50   . More particularly, as shown on the right side of  FIG.  50    having the power adapter arrangement  5000 , an outlet  5020  is coupled to a switch  5022  to receive the line power from one of the T2 or T1/LD contact elements. A voltage detector  5024  is coupled to one of the T2 or T1/LD contact elements and generates an output signal to the control circuit to indicate whether line voltage is on the Traveler 1 or Traveler 2. The control circuit  5026  controls the state of the switch to provide the line voltage to the outlet. That is, because the line voltage is only on one of the T2 and T1/LD contact elements, it is necessary to switch the switch  5022  to provide the line voltage to the outlet. A switch  5034  is also provided to enable the generation of a DC signal. More particularly, the inputs to the switch  5034  are coupled to the T2 and T1/LD contact elements. The control circuit will also control the state of the switch  5034  to ensure that the AC/DC circuit  5032  always receives the line power. Therefore, because power is always on one of T2 or T1/LD contact elements, the voltage detector will always be able to detect which contact element the line voltage is on and provide a constant voltage to the outlet  5020  and the AC/DC circuit  5032 . 
     Various implementations and the operation of switching control modules that may be implemented in a power adapter on either the line side or the load side are described in reference to  FIGS.  51 - 57   . Turning first to  FIG.  51   , a block diagram showing an operation of a control module  5102  for controlling switching on a line side of a 3-way switch is shown. I 0 =I 1 +I 2 , where I 1  (on Traveler 1 or Traveler 2) is the component drawn by the load side and is independent of I 2 . A first AC/DC circuit  5103  is coupled to the contact element T2, and a second AC/DC circuit  5104  is coupled to the T1/LD contact element. A multiplexer  5106  is coupled to the output of the AC/DC circuits to receive signals S1 and S2. A control circuit (CTR CKT)  5108  is also coupled to the output of the AC/DC circuits and is coupled to control the multiplexer  5106  using a control signal CTRL2. A switch  5110  is coupled to the T2 and LN/LD contact elements. A line detection circuit  5112  is couple between the T2 contact element and the control circuit. A second line detection circuit  5114  is coupled between the T1/LD contact element and the control circuit. An external input  5116 , such as a wireless control signal, is coupled to the control circuit. It should be noted that an external input could be any type of non-manual input (e.g., a control signal from a phone using Wi-Fi or a signal received by a motion sensor). 
     When the light is off, I 1 =0. The line side wirelessly controlled switching control module may be drawing I 2 , but that is independent of I 1 . The switch may be rated to be used with a minimum power, such as 5 Watts of power, where the line detection circuit  5114  will need to detect a change in the I 1  current of about 35 mA or greater for example. When used on the line side, the control circuit  5108  will detect a change in current I 1  from 0 A to 35 mA or greater but will not detect a change in voltage in response to a change in the switch on the load side (i.e., 120 V will be on either Traveler 1 or Traveler 2 regardless of a change in the switch  620  on the load side). If the light is off, and I 1 =0, neither line detection circuit  5112  or  5114  will detect a current. If the load side switch is switched, I 1  current will be drawn on Traveler 2, and will be detected by the line detection circuit  5112  connected to Traveler 2 at the T2 contact element. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  52   , a block diagram showing an operation of the control module of  FIG.  51    on a load side of a 3-way switch is shown. On the load side, I 0  is not independent of I 2 . Changes in I 0  detected by the LDC circuits will depend upon changes in both I 1  and I 2 . It may be necessary to detect whether a change in I 0  is caused by a change in I 1  or I 2 . However, on the load side, the control circuit will detect a change in the voltage on Traveler 1 or Traveler 2, which will indicate a switching of the 120 V between Traveler 1 or Traveler 2 in response to a toggling of the switch in the line side power adapter. Therefore, if a switching control module detects a switching of the voltage (between 0 and 120 V) on Traveler 1 or Traveler 2 that it did not cause (i.e., by the control circuit on the load side switching relay R1), it will know that there is a switching of the switch  620  on the line side power adapter. If the switching control module does not detect a change in the voltage (between 0 and 120 V) on Traveler 1 or Traveler 2, but detects a current change, it will also know that there is a switching of the opposite side power adapter (i.e., the switching control module is on the line side and the manual switching is on the load side as previously described). 
     Turning now to  FIG.  53   , a block diagram of the control module  5302 , which is similar to the control module of  FIG.  51    but having a single power supply, is shown. That is, the control module  5302  comprises an AC/DC circuit  5304  coupled to an output of a switch  5306 , which may comprise a relay for example. A control circuit  5308  is coupled to control a switch  5310  coupled to receive the line voltage at LN/LD contact element and route a current I 0  through the switch  5310  to the T1/LD contact element or the T2 contact element as shown. 
     A pair of line detection circuits are coupled to the control circuit to enable the control circuit to control the state of the switch  5306  and the state of the switch  5310 . More particularly, the line detection circuit  5312  is coupled to detect the current I 2  routed to the T2 contact element. The line detection circuit  5314  is coupled to detect the current I 1  to the T1/LD contact element. The control circuit will control the states of the switch  5306  to provide the line voltage to the AC/DC circuit  5304  and allow the AC/DC circuit to generate a DC signal used by the control module. That is, if current is detected being routed to the contact element T2, the control circuit will control the switch  5306  so that the line power is provided to the AC/DC circuit as shown. If current is detected being coupled to the T1/LD contact element, the control circuit will change the switch  5306  to the other state to route the line voltage to the AC/DC circuit  5304 . Similarly, the control circuit will control the state of the switch  5310  to route the line voltage to the desired T2 contact element or T1/LD contact element, depending upon the desired state of applying power to the load. A motion sensor  5316  may also provide a control signal to the control circuit to control the state of the power applied to the load. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  54   , another block diagram shows an operation of a control module  5402  for controlling switching on a line side of a 3-way switch. A control circuit  5412  selects an output of one of the AC/DC circuits  5404  and  5406  based upon the S1 and S2 signals. Only one of Traveler 1 or Traveler 2 will have 120 V and generate a DC output. A capacitor circuit could be used to maintain +5V at the output of the multiplexer (MUX)  5408  during switching. A current detector  5410  could be used at the output of the MUX to determine if the change in I 0  is caused by I 2 . The current at the output of the MUX could be used to estimate the I 2  current drawn by one of the AC/DC circuits based upon the efficiency of the AC/DC circuits. The control circuit could be used to detect a change in current I 2  and compared to a change in the current I 0  detected by a line detection circuit (LDC). It may be necessary to rate the switch for use with a minimum watt bulb (e.g., 5 W bulb that would draw 37.5 mA) to determine the resolution of the current detection by the current detector  5410  and the LDC  5414 . The LDC may need to take a variation of 120V line voltage (e.g., 10%) or a significant drop (e.g., a power glitch) in 120V into account. However, because the currents being detected will all be based upon the same input voltage, it may not be necessary to compensate for a variation in the line voltage. An external input may be provided by a circuit  5416 , such as a motion sensor. The control circuit  5412  may control the state of a switch  5418  for applying power to the load based upon an externa input, or the detection of a switching by the switch  620  on either power adapter. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  55   , another block diagram showing an operation of the control module  5402  of  FIG.  54    on a load side of a 3-way switching arrangement is shown. The same principle is applied on the load side as  FIG.  54   , where it is possible to detect a change in the voltage on Traveler 1 or Traveler 2 that will indicate a manual switching on the line side. That is, the current at the output of the MUX could be used to estimate the I 2  current drawn by on one of the AC/DC circuits based upon the efficiency of the AC/DC circuit. The control circuit could be used to detect a change in current I 2  and compare that to a change in the current I 0  detected by the LDC. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  56   , another block diagram of the control module  5602 , which is similar to the control module of  FIG.  54    but having a single power supply and a single line detection circuit, is shown. More particularly, the control module  5602  comprises an AC/DC circuit  5604  coupled to a switch  5606 . The switch  5606  is coupled to T1/LD and T2 contact elements. A current detector  5607  is coupled to the AC/DC circuit, where an output of the current detector is coupled to a control circuit  5608 . A line detection circuit  5610  is also coupled to the LN/LD contact element to detect a line current, where an output of the line detection circuit  5610  is coupled to the control circuit  5608 . The control circuit will control the state of the switch  5606  to provide power to the current detector and generate a 5 Volt signal. The control circuit will also control the state of a switch  5612  based upon a desired state of the power provided to the load. A motion sensor  5614  may be coupled to the control circuit to enable control of the switching of power to the load. 
     In operation, when the current detector detects the 5 Volt output of the AC/DC circuit  5604 , the current detector will send a signal to the control circuit, which will switch the state of the switch  5606  to ensure that the AC/DC circuit receives the line voltage. The line detection circuit  5610  will detect whether the amount of current has changed in the line current I 0 , indicating that there has been a switching on the load side of the 3-way switching arrangement. 
       FIG.  57    is a block diagram of a control module  5700  having a switching circuit for implementing a switching operation in the control modules of  FIGS.  53  and  56   . According to the implementation of  FIG.  57   , a single current detector may be used to detect current I 1  or I 1′ , both of which are independent of the current I 2  drawn by the AC/DC circuits, and therefore, are only dependent on current being drawn by the load when the control module  5700  is used on the line side. More particularly, the circuit comprises a switch  5702  couple to receive the line voltage at a LN/LD contact element and route the line voltage to one of the T1/LD or T2 contact elements. A DC generator circuit  5704  comprises an AC/DC circuit  5706  coupled to receive an AC signal from a switch  5708  adapted to receive a line voltage from the contact element T1/LD or the T2 contact element as shown. A voltage detector (VD)  5710  is coupled to the T2 contact element and adapted to generate a voltage detection signal to a control circuit  5712 , which may also receive a signal from an external input  5714 , which may comprise a motion sensor or some other input for example. A plurality of coils is also implemented to provide a signal to a current detector. More particularly, a first coil  5716  coupled between the T1/LD contact element and neutral and a second coil  5718  decoupled between the T2 contact element and neutral are adapted to generate a signal in a coil  5720  that is detected by a current detector  5721 . That is, the main coil  5720  can be used to sense the current on either coil  5718  or coil  5716 , where the current detector may provide a signal to the control circuit  5712 . The voltage detector  5710  is used to detect a switching of the switch on the line side (i.e., based upon a switching of the line voltage on the Traveler 1 or Traveler 2) when the control module  5700  is used on the load side. 
     An example of a switch  5702  is shown in the dashed line portion on the left-hand portion of  FIG.  57    and designated as R1 is now described. The switch  5702  may comprise a current detector  5721  implemented as an optocoupler coupled between a resistor  5722  and the neutral node, which is coupled to a neutral contact element  5742 . A resistor  5724  is also coupled to the resistor  5722  and the base of a transistor  5725 . A diode  5726  is coupled between the resistor  5724  and the neutral node. A resistor network comprising a resistor  5728  and a resistor  5730  are coupled to the collector of the transistor  5725 . A resistor  5731  is coupled to the resistor  5728  and the collector of the transistor  5732 . The collector is also coupled to the base of a transistor  5732 , and a resistor  5734  coupled in series with a diode  5736 , which is coupled to the neutral node as shown. 
     A pair of TRIACs are also implemented to route current to the T1 and T2 contact elements. More particularly, a first TRIAC  5738  is coupled between the LN/LD contact element  5748  and the T1 contact element  5744 . A second TRIAC  5740  is coupled between the LN/LD contact element  5748  and the T2 contact element  5746 . A current generator  5752  is coupled to the LN/LD contact element  5748 , and a load  5750  is coupled to contact elements  5744  and  5746  associated with the travelers. 
     Additional examples of power adapters having control modules that implement line detection circuits are described in reference to  FIGS.  58  through  70   . Turning first to  FIG.  58   , a block diagram of a system  5800  having a first power adapter arrangement with the control module  5402  having a wirelessly controlled switch and a second power adapter arrangement with a control module  604  wired in a 3-way switching configuration is shown. Because the 120 V AC signal will always be present on the LN/LD contact element, the line detection circuit will always detect the 120 V signal and the control circuit will detect that the control module  5402  is on the line side of the 3-way switching arrangement. The power adapter will detect a switching of the switch  620  on the load side as described above in reference to  FIG.  54   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  59   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with the control module  5402  having a wirelessly controlled switch and a second power adapter arrangement with the control module  402  having a DC circuit wired in a 3-way switching configuration  5900  is shown. As shown in  FIG.  59   , current I 3  in the control module  402  on the load side is drawn by the DC circuit of the control module in addition to current I 4  being drawn by the load. However, there are many implementations of the DC circuit that would enable the current I 3  to remain constant or be distinguished from the current I 4  drawn by the load. For example, a fixed current source could be implemented to maintain a constant current I 3 , enabling a change in the current I 4 , and therefore a change in current I 0  can be detected. Therefore, the operation of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  59    will be similar to the operation of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  58   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  60   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a standard control module and a second power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled switch wired in a 3-way switching configuration  6000  is shown. The switching and detection of current according to the arrangement of  FIG.  60    is similar to the signaling and detection of current when the control module is on the line side, as described above in reference to  FIG.  55   . According to some implementations, when a wirelessly controlled switch is inserted, the control module will toggle the switch to determine if it is on the line side or the load side. If it is on the line side, a 120 V AC signal will be detected on the LN/LD contact element in either state of the switch  620 . If the control module is on the load side, the signal on the LN/LD contact element may have 120V based upon a toggling of the switch of the control module on the load side. Determining of a location of a control module may be beneficial for pairing (e.g., establishing a master control module as described above). 
     Turning now to  FIG.  61   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a standard control module having a DC circuit and a second power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled switch wired in a 3-way switching configuration  6100  is shown. According to the implementation of  FIG.  61   , the line detection circuit will detect a change in the current I 5  which may depend on the current I 4  drawn by the other circuits of the control module  5402 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  62   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a standard control module having a DC circuit and a second power adapter arrangement with a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration  6200  is shown. It should be noted that any non-switching circuit of a control module will not affect the switching operation of a 3-way circuit arrangement. The control module  402  will draw current by way of the T1/LD contact element or the T2 contact element but will not affect the power adapter  602  on the line side from providing the line voltage on either the Traveler 1 or Traveler 2 to enable routing power to the load  314 , where the switching of power to the load will operate as described in reference to  FIG.  18    (i.e., where the switching is based upon switching of the switches  620 ). 
     Turning now to  FIG.  63   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a standard control module and a second power adapter arrangement with a standard control module having a DC circuit wired in a 3-way switching configuration  6300  is shown. It should also be noted that any non-switching circuit of a control module  402  on the load side will not affect the operation of a 3-way circuit. The control module  402  will draw current by way of the T1/LD contact element or the T2 contact element but will not affect providing the line voltage on either the Traveler 1 or Traveler 2 to enable routing power to the load  314 , where the switching of power to the load will also operate as described in reference to  FIG.  18   . The AC/DC circuit of the power adapter  402  will both determine whether the line voltage is on the T1/LD or T2 contact element and generate a DC signal based upon that. 
     It is possible to change the state of power to the load based upon a wireless signal, as described by way of example in some of the  FIGS.  64 - 78   . Turning first to  FIG.  64   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled switch and a second power adapter arrangement with a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration  6400  is shown. A control module  6402  comprises in AC/DC circuit  6404  having inputs coupled to the T1/LD contact element and T2 contact element. Because there will always be power on one of the T1/LD and T2 contact elements, the AC/DC circuit  6404  will receive power and generate a DC signal, shown here by way of example as a 5 Volt DC signal. The DC signal is coupled to the SWC switch contact which is routed through the switch  620  to either the SW1 contact element or SW2 contact element. A change in the voltage on the SW1 contact element or the SW2 contact element indicates a manual switching of the switch  620 , which is detected by the control circuit  6406 . The control circuit will then control the switch  6408 , which may be a relay, a solid-state switch or some other switching device, to change the state of the power applied to the load  314 . A line detection circuit  6410  is coupled to the LN/LD contact element to enable the control circuit  6406  to determine whether the control module  6402  is on the line side or the load side of the 3-way switching arrangement. The control circuit is also coupled to a motion sensor  6412  and a wireless communication circuit  6414 . Accordingly, the control module  6402  can detect a desire to change the state of power applied to the load in 4 ways, including an actuation of the switch  620 , a detection by the motion sensor  6412 , a signal received by the wireless communication circuit  6414 , or a detection of a switching of the switch  620  of the power adapter on the load side. The operation of the control module  6402  on the load side of the 3-way switching arrangement will be described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  65   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  65   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a standard control module and a second power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled switch wired in a 3-way switching configuration  6500  is shown. When the control module  6402  is placed on the load side, the line detection circuit will detect a toggling of the voltage on the LN/LD contact element, where the LN/LD contact element is coupled to the load. The line detection circuit  6410  will also detect a change in the power applied to the T1/LD contact and the T2 contact element that may be a result of the switching of the switch  620  on the line side power adapter  602 . That is, the line detection circuit may detect a glitch at the output of the AC/DC circuit for example and therefore detect a desire to change a state of the power to the load. Alternatively, the line detection circuit will detect a change in a switching of the switch  620  on the line side by detecting a state of the voltage on the LN/LD contact element. That is, when the line voltage is switched from the T1/LD contact element to the T2 contact element, the line voltage will now be detected on the LN/LD contact element based upon the state of the switch  6408 . The line detection circuit will generate an output signal Vo to the control circuit, which will change the state of the load by changing the state of the switch  6408 . The control circuit will also change the state of the switch  6408  in response to a change in the state of the switch  620  of the power adapter  602  on the load side, as well as a detection by the motion sensor  6412  or a signal received by the wireless communication circuit  6414 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  66   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled outlet and a second power adapter arrangement with a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration  6600  is shown. According to the implementation of  FIG.  66   , a control module  6602  comprises a circuit for switching the power to an outlet. More particularly, an AC/DC circuit  6604  is coupled to the T2 contact element, and a second AC/DC circuit  6606  is coupled to the T1/LD contact element. A signal S1 at the output of the AC/DC circuit  6606  is coupled to a first terminal of a multiplexer  6608  and a signal S2 at the output of the AC/DC circuit  6604  is coupled to a second terminal of the multiplexer  6608 . The outputs S1 and S2, which may comprise DC voltages, are also routed to a control circuit  6610  to enable the control circuit to select the signal S1 or S2 that is receiving power and therefore providing a DC voltage signal to the control circuit. The control circuit is coupled to a switch  6612  to route the line power received at one of the two inputs of the switch coupled to the T2 contact element and the T1/LD contact element. The output of the switch is coupled to a voltage buffer  6614  to provide the 120 V line voltage to the outlet  6616 . The voltage buffer is provided to prevent any glitches that may result from switching to the switch. A DC circuit  6618 , shown here by way of example as a USB circuit, could be coupled to the output of the multiplexer  6608 , which is a DC signal. 
     Switching examples are the same for the wirelessly controlled switch on the line side. When a wirelessly controlled outlet module is inserted, the control module may toggle the switch to determine if it is on the line side or the load side. If it is on the line side, 120 V will always be on the LN/LD contact element. If it is on the load side, the voltage on the LN/LD contact element will toggle between 0V and 120V. Determining which side the control module is on may be beneficial if two wirelessly controlled control modules are used, and particularly for auto pairing. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  67   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a standard control module and a second power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled outlet wired in a 3-way switching configuration  6700  is shown. As can be seen in  FIG.  67   , the control module  6602  having a controlled outlet will also be coupled to the T2 and T1/LD contact elements. As can be seen in  FIGS.  66  and  67   , the two inputs of the switch  6612  are coupled to the T2 and T1/LD contact elements and enable the control module  6602  to be used on either the line side power adapter or the load-side power adapter. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  68   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled outlet and USB and a second power adapter arrangement with a standard control module wired in a 3-way switching configuration  6800  is shown. The control module  6802  comprises a switch  6804  coupled between the voltage buffer  6614  and the outlet  6616 . The switch  6804  may comprise a relay or some other solid-state switch that is controllable to pass the line voltage to the outlet. The control module  6802  may also comprise a wireless communication circuit  6806  that is adapted to receive control signals that may control the operation of the switch  6804  by way of the control circuit  6610 . The DC circuit of  FIG.  66    may be implemented as a USB circuit  6808  as shown. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  69   , a block diagram of a first power adapter arrangement with a standard control module and a second power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled outlet and USB wired in a 3-way switching configuration  6900  is shown. As can be seen in  FIG.  69   , the control module  6802  having a controlled outlet will also be coupled to the T2 and T1/LD contact elements. As can be seen in  FIGS.  68  and  69   , the two inputs of the switch  6612  coupled to the T2 and T1/LD contact elements enable the control module  6802  to be used on either the line side power adapter or the load-side power adapter. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  70   , a block diagram of power adapter arrangements wired in a 4-way circuit  7000  is shown. The power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  70    comprises 3 power adapters. In addition to power adapters  602  having a control module  604  on both the line side and the load side, a power adapter  7002  comprises a double pole double throw (DPDT) switch  7004  and a module  7006 . While it is not necessary to couple a module to the power adapter  7002 , a module  7006  may comprise any module adapted to receive a DC signal, such as a night light or module having USB connectors. As can be seen, the operation of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  70    is similar to a 4-way switching arrangement that is commonly used. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  71   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  7100  having separate line and load contact elements and a standard control module is shown. The power adapter  602  comprises an electrical interface having nine contact elements as shown. The control module  7102  comprises a first conductor element  7104  between the line contact element and the SWC contact element, a second conductor element  7106  between the T1 contact element and the SW1 contact element, and a third conductor element  7108  between the T2 contact element and the SW2 contact element. The line contact element and load contact element are coupled together as shown. Because the line voltage is provided to the T1 contact element the switch  620  operates as a single pole switch to provide the line power to the load. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  72   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  7200  having separate line and load contact elements and a control module  7202  having a standard dimmer circuit is shown. According to the implementation of  FIG.  72   , the control module  7202  comprises a dimmer circuit  7204 . While any type of dimmer circuit that does not require the generation of a DC signal to power elements of the circuit could be used, one example of a dimmer circuit is shown and corresponds to the dimmer circuit of  FIG.  7   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  73   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  7300  having separate line and load contact elements and a control module with a wirelessly controlled dimmer is shown. According to the implementation of  FIG.  73   , the control module  7302  comprises an AC/DC circuit  7304  that generates a DC signal, shown by way of example as a 5 Volt signal it control circuit  7306  is coupled to both a remote sense circuit  7308  and a switch  7310 . The control circuit is also coupled to a detection circuit  7312  that provides the DC signal to the contact element, which is routed through terminal  622  to one of the SW1 or SW2 contact elements. The detection circuit will detect a switching of the switch  620  and provide a detection signal to the control circuit. The remote sense circuit  7308  will also sense a switching of the switch  620  from a power adapter on the other side of a 3-way switching arrangement when the control module  7302  is used in a 3-way switching arrangement. The switch  7310  is controlled by the control circuit to route power back to the load contact element, where a dimmer circuit  7314  may be implemented in between the switch  7310  and the load contact element, or in place of the switch  7310 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  74   , a block diagram of a system  7400  having a first power adapter arrangement with a standard control module and a second power adapter arrangement with a standard control module in a 3-way switching configuration is shown. The power adapter arrangement comprises a control module  7102  attached to both power adapters on the line side and the load side as shown. The line power is routed to the load contact element on the power adapter on the line side and is then provided to either the T1 or T2 contact element. The line power is received by the T1 or T2 contact elements of the power adapter on the load side and is routed to the SW1 or SW2 contact element. As can be seen, the 3-way switching arrangement will operate as a conventional 3-way switching arrangement to switch power to the load. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  75   , a block diagram of a system  7500  having a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a dimmer circuit and a second power adapter arrangement with a standard control module in a 3-way switching configuration is shown. According to the implementation of  FIG.  75   , the control module  7202  may be implemented on the line side, where the switching operation is the same as the switching operation of  FIG.  74   , where the line voltage maybe modified by the control module  7202 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  76   , a block diagram of a system  7600  having a first power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled dimmer and a second power adapter arrangement with a control module having a wirelessly controlled dimmer in a 3-way switching configuration is shown. When the control module  7302  is used on both sides of a 3-way switching arrangement, the control modules may communicate wirelessly, and one of the control modules may operate as a master and perform the switching. For example, the control module  7302  on the line side may operate only to detect a change in the switch  620  and provide a wireless signal indicating that a toggling of the switch  620  to which it is attached has occurred. The control module  7302  on the load side will then control the application of the power to the load contact element. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  77   , a block diagram of a system  7700  having a first power adapter arrangement with a control module  7702  and a second power adapter arrangement with a wirelessly controlled dimmer control module  7704  in a 3-way switching configuration is shown. According to the implementation of  FIG.  77   , each power adapters comprises eight contact elements in the electrical interface  630 . The control module  7702  coupled to the power adapter  602  on the line side comprises an AC/DC circuit  7706  adapted to generate a DC voltage. The DC voltage is provided to the SWC contact element, and a control circuit  7708 , shown by way of example as a microcontroller (MCU) is coupled to detect a change on the SW1 or SW2 contact elements. A remote sense circuit  7710  is coupled to the MCU and provides a signal on the contact element T2 that is detected by a remote sense circuit  7711  of the control module  7704 . The control module  7704  comprises an AC/DC circuit  7712  to generate a DC signal. The control module also comprises a control circuit  7714  coupled to a wireless communication circuits  7718 , shown by way of example as a Wi-Fi SOM that is coupled to detect a change in the switch  620  of the power adapter on the load side. The control circuit controls a switch  7716  to control the application of the power to the LN/LD contact element of the power adapter  602  that is coupled to the load. As can be seen, the control module  7702  is implemented to provide a signal associated with the toggling of the switch  620  on the line side, while the control module  7704  is adapted to control the switching of the power to the load, which may be in response to a signal received by the wireless communication circuit  7718 , which may be used to control the operation of a dimmer circuit  7720 . 
     According to some implementations, a switch for switching the line voltage to the load may be placed in the control module, where the control module is coupled to a base. Turning first to  FIG.  78   , a block diagram of a switching arrangement  7800  having a base and standard SPST control module is shown. More particularly, a base  7802  comprises an electrical interface  7804  that receives the line voltage at a LN/LD contact element which is routed to the LN/LD contact element of a control module  7806 . A single pole, single throw switch  316  is coupled between the LN/LD contact element and the T1/LD contact element. The line voltage is routed to the load by way of the switch  316 . An electrical interface  7808  comprises a plurality of contact elements of the base  7802  and of the control module  7806 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  79   , a block diagram of a switching arrangement  7900  having a base for 3-way wiring and a standard SPST control module is shown. The base  7902  comprises a contact element for a second traveler to enable 3-way switching as will be described in more detail below. The control module  7906  comprises the switch  620  and can route the line voltage to either of the T1/LD or LN/LD contact elements. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  80   , a block diagram of a switching arrangement  8000  having a base for 3-way wiring and a control module with a standard SPST switch and a dimmer circuit is shown. According to the implementation of  FIG.  80   , the control module  8006  comprises a dimmer circuit  8010  between the LN/LD contact element and the switch  620 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  81   , a block diagram of a switching arrangement  8100  having a base for 3-way wiring and a control module with a wirelessly controlled SPDT switch is shown. The control module  8101  controls a switch  620  and comprises a control circuit  8108  to control the application of power to the load. Because a 120 V power will be on either one of the traveler lines (i.e., on the T2 or T1/LD contact elements), a multiplexer circuit  8106  could be used to select the output of one of two AC/DC circuits  8102  and  8104  to generate a low voltage DC signal (e.g., 5 volts) that is provided to the control circuit  8108 , where the control circuit detects a switching of the switch  620 . A line detection circuit  8112  and line detection circuit  8113  may provide line detection signals to the control circuit to enable the control circuit to control the switch  8110  and switch the line voltage between the T2 contact element, which is not connected, and T1/LD contact element, which is coupled to the load. An external circuit  8114 , which may be a wireless communication circuit for example, may be implemented to provide a switching operation. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  82   , a block diagram of a switching arrangement  8200  having a base for 3-way wiring and a control module with a SPST switch and a line detection circuit is shown. The switching arrangement of  FIG.  82    is similar to the switching arrangement of  FIG.  81   , except that the switching arrangement  8202  comprises a dimmer circuit  8204  between the LN/LD contact element and the switch  8110 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  83   , a block diagram of a switching arrangement  8300  having a base for 3-way wiring and a control module with an outlet and a line detection circuit is shown.  FIG.  83    is similar to the implementation of  FIG.  81   , except that the control module  8302  comprises an outlet  8303  that is controlled by the control circuit. More particularly, the control circuit is coupled to control the line voltage coupled to a switch  8304 , which may be a relay for example, and a voltage buffer  8306  is coupled to the output of the switch to prevent any glitches on the line voltages applied to the outlet  8303 . A wireless communication circuit  8308  may also be provided to enable wireless control of power to the outlet. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  84   , a block diagram of a system  8400  having a base with a control module having a simple dimmer and a base with a standard SPDT control module is shown. The control module  8006  is implemented on the line side of the 3-way switching circuit. The 3-way switching operation is similar to the 3-way switching operation as described above in reference to  FIG.  19   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  85   , a block diagram of a switching arrangement  8500  having a base with a control module with a simple dimmer and a base with a standard SPDT control module is shown. The operation of the switching arrangement  8500  of  FIG.  85    is similar to the operation of the switching arrangement  8100  of  FIG.  81   . According to the implementation of  FIG.  85   , the external circuit  8114  is replaced with a wireless communication circuit  8502 , which provides control signals to the control circuit to control the application of the power to the load by way of the switch  620 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  86   , a block diagram of a switching arrangement  8600  having a base with a control module with a wirelessly controlled switch and a base with a standard SPDT control module is shown. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  87   , a block diagram of a switching arrangements  8700  having a base with a control module with a controlled outlet and a base with a standard SPDT control module is shown. 
     Reducing parts and simplifying the requirements for power adapter arrangements, is beneficial to manufacturers, builders and homeowners. One significant way to reduce parts is to enable a power adapter, such as a power adapter having a switch or an outlet, to function without any control module. In the case of a power adapter having a switch, it is beneficial to eliminate the need for a control module, and preferably provide a reliable design with a reduced part count. While the elimination of a control module may require some additional parts in the power adapter, the modification to power adapters shown below significantly reduce the overall part count and the complexity of the power adapter arrangement. Turning first to  FIG.  88   , a block diagram of a power adapter configured to operate without a control module is shown. The power adapter  602  of the power adapter arrangement can be modified to implement a power adapter that is adapted to operate without a control module. More particularly, the power adapter comprises a plurality of contact elements of the electrical interface  630  including connectors  8802  and  8804  (shown in the dashed circles) that are adapted to provide the function of the conductors for routing of signals that are normally routed within the standard control module. 
     The connectors  8802  and  8804  may comprise contact elements that are normally closed (i.e., providing an electrical connection between the contact elements to enable the connectors  8802  and  8804  to conduct current), but where the connector will be opened (i.e., create an open circuit) to block the passage of current or a voltage through the connector when certain control modules having an actuator that aligns with the connector are inserted into a recess of the power adapter. The connectors  8802  and  8804  could be any type of device for passing or blocking current or a voltage by providing isolation between the input and the output of the connectors. The connectors  8802  or  8804  could be simple devices that comprise two conducting components that make an electrical connection that can be broken, or could be dedicated switches for example. Examples of some connectors that could be implemented for connectors  8802  and  8804  are described for example in  FIGS.  92 ,  93 ,  95 ,  96 , and  112 - 120   . 
     The connector  8802  that connects the SWC contact element and the LN/LD contact element on the modified switch provides the electrical connection between the SWC and LN/LD contact elements that is provided by the conductor  666  between the SWC and LN/LD contact elements of the control module  604  of the power adapter arrangement. Similarly, the connector  8804  that connects the SW1 contact element and the T1/LD contact element and provides the electrical connection between the SW1 and T1/LD contact elements that is provided by the conductor  668  between the SW1 and T1/LD contact elements of the control module  604  of the power adapter arrangement. The connectors  8802  and  8804  may comprise break connectors (i.e., normally closed connectors that can be opened by an actuator of the control module or the power adapter when a control module is inserted into the power adapter) as will be described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  89   . 
     As can be seen in  FIG.  88   , line power provided to the LN/LD contact element is routed to the SWC contact element by way of the connector  8802 , which is in the closed position or state (i.e., in a state to pass the line voltage or current). The line power provided to the SW1 contact element is routed to the T1/LD contact element by way of the connector  8804 , which is also in the closed position. Therefore, the line power is routed through the switch  316  (when the switch  316  is closed as shown) from the LN/LD contact element to the SWC contact element and through the switch  316  to the T1/LD contact element by way of the connector  8804  and back to the load. By providing the connector  8802  and  8804 , the standard control module can be eliminated as shown. However, because the connector  8802  and  8804  can be opened (i.e., create an open circuit between the nodes between the connectors that provide an electrical connection), a control module can be used to receive line power and control the application of power to the load when attached to the power adapter, as will be described in more detail below in reference to  FIG.  89   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  89   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  8900  having a control module for controlling the application of power to a load is shown. The control module  5700  comprises actuators  8902 ,  8904  and  8906 , wherein actuators  8902  and  8906  are adapted to control the connectors  8802  and  8804 . More particularly, actuator  8902  causes the connectors  8802  to create an open circuit, while actuator  8906  causes the connector  8804  to create an open circuit. As will be described in more detail below in reference to  FIGS.  90 - 91   , the actuator  8904  will create an open circuit in a power adapter that operates in a 3-way circuit. According to one implementation, the actuators may comprise insulating elements, such as a plastic divider for example, which creates a gap between contact elements of the connectors  8802  and  8804  to create open circuits and allow power to be routed through the control module. According to other implementations, the actuators may be a part of the power adapter, where the movement of the actuator is caused by the insertion of the control module. For example, the actuator may comprise a portion extending into the recess of the power adapter, where the portion of the actuator is moved when the control module is inserted into the power adapter. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  90   , another block diagram of a power adapter configured to operate without a control module is shown. The power adapter  602  comprising the switch  620  can be modified to eliminate the standard control module by including three connectors  9004 ,  9006  and  9008 . That is, the connector  9004  that connects the SWC contact element and the LN/LD contact element provides the electrical connection between the SWC and LN/LD contact elements that is provided by the conductor  666  between the SWC and LN/LD contact elements of the standard control module  604  of the power adapter arrangement  1800 . Similarly, the connector  9008  that connects the SW1 contact element and the T1/LD contact element provides the electrical connection between the SW1 and T1/LD contact elements that is provided by the electrical connection between the SW1 and T1/LD contact elements of the standard control module of the power adapter arrangement. The connector  9006  that connects the SW2 contact element and the T2 contact element provides the electrical connection between the SW2 and T2 contact elements that is provided by the conductor between the SW2 and T2 contact elements of the standard control module of the 3-way switching configuration  1800 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  91   , another block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  9100  having a control module for controlling the application of power to a load is shown. As can be seen in  FIG.  91   , the actuators  8902 - 8906  create an open connection in the connectors  9004 ,  9006 , and  9008  to allow power to be routed through the control module  5700 . The power adapter  9000 , which comprises a single pole, double throw switch, will operate as a 3-way switch with used in a 3-way connection when a control module is not attached (i.e., power from the LN contact element can be provided to one of the two traveler lines (i.e., on the T1/LD or T2 contact elements) by way of the switch  620  and the connectors  9004  and  9008 ), but allow power to be applied to a control module coupled to a power adapter, where the control module may control the application of power to a load. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  92   , a diagram of a connector adapted to break a connection in a power adapter having a switch is shown, and particularly changing from a first state on the left to a second state on the right. More particularly, the connectors  8802  and  8804  of  FIG.  88    and the connectors  9004 ,  9006  and  9008  of  FIG.  90    can be implemented as spring-loaded contact elements between two contact nodes (e.g., between SWC and LN/LD contact elements for connectors  8802  and  9004 ). While the contact element is shown controlled by a separate spring, it should be understood that the contact element could be on the end of a leaf spring connected to a contact node. That is, a contact element implemented as a lead spring may comprise two ends that are connected, where a contact element at the center of the leaf spring may be bowed in a direction to create an electrical connection. According to another implementation, a contact element may be at the end of a flexure, where a contact element may be placed at the end of a flexible portion, where the flexible portion is adapted to move when pressure is placed on the contact element, such as when the contact element comes into contact with a corresponding contact element. The actuator could be an insulating element, such as the blade of  FIGS.  89  and  91    or an element of the power adapter that is moved when the control module is inserted into the power adapter. The connector comprises a printed circuit board  9202  having a first contact portion  9204  and a second contact portion  9206 , where a movable contact element  9208  is controlled by a spring  9210 . The contact element of  FIG.  92    is closed when in a first state, and opened when in a second state (i.e., when a control module is inserted into the power adapter). 
     Turning now to  FIG.  93   , a diagram of another connector adapted to break a connection in a power adapter having a switch is shown, and particularly changing from a first state on the left to a second state on the right. According to the implementation of  FIG.  93   , a movable contact element may be controlled by a spring, where the contact is closed in a first state and opened by the actuator in the second state. More particularly, the connector of  FIG.  93    comprises a circuit board  9302  having a first contact element  9304  and a second contact element  9306 , where a contact element  9308  that is held in place by a spring  9310 . When an actuator  9212  is moved from a first state to a second state as shown, the electrical connection between the contact element  9308  and the contact elements  9304  and  9306  is broken to create an open circuit. While  FIGS.  92  and  93    are shown by way of example as having PCBs, it should be understood that the contact elements could be used with metal connectors that are not connected to a PCB. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  94   , a side view of arrangements of a plurality of contact elements is shown, including a first configuration on the left and a second configuration on the right. The contacts, shown here by way of example as blades, may be arranged to provide isolation for the switch contact elements (i.e., SWC, SW1 and SW2) that may carry DC signal from other contacts that may carry high voltage signals. The ground contacts and insulating elements may be longer than the other contacts to make or break a contact first when a control module is attached to a power adapter (or break or make a contact last when a control module is detached from a power adapter). More particularly, a first contact element  9402  having a first height, which is less than the height of a second contact element  9404 , which is a ground contact element. Actuators  9406  have a height that is also greater than the height of the contact element  9402  to break a connection before the remaining contacts having the height of the contact element  9402  make an electrical connection. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  95   , a diagram of an arrangement of receptacle contact elements for receiving a corresponding contact elements and elements for breaking a contact is shown, and particularly showing the state of contacts without actuators on the left and with actuator on the right. According to the implementation of  FIG.  95   , the contact elements may be configured to receive a corresponding contact element of a control module, such as the contact elements of  FIG.  94   . Modified contact elements may be implemented to be normally closed, where an open circuit can be created when insulating elements  9512  and  9514  (such as the actuators  9406  of  FIG.  94   ) is inserted into the modified contact elements (as shown on the right side of the arrow in  FIG.  95   ). According to one implementation, the modified contact elements can be placed between the contact elements to which they connect and may be connected on a PCB for example. 
     More particularly, Area  1  shows a plurality of contact elements including conventional contact elements  9502  and  9503  and a connector  9504  that is adapted to be normally closed but may be opened when a control module is inserted into the power adapter. Both contact elements  9502  and  9503  are adapted to receive contact elements, such as a blade contact element for example. Area  2  also comprises a plurality of contact elements including conventional contact elements and a connector  9506  having contact elements  9516  and  9518  that is adapted to be normally closed but be opened when a control module is inserted into the power adapter. Both contact elements  9502  and  9503  are adapted to receive contact elements, such as a blade connector for example. However, connector  9504  comprises a first contact element  9508  and a second contact element  9510 . As shown in  FIG.  95   , the two projections of the contact element  9502  are connected along the bottom and provide a single node. In contrast, contact elements  9508  and  9510  of the connector  9504  are not connected along the bottom to receive corresponding contact elements. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  96   , a diagram of another arrangement of receptacle contact elements for receiving corresponding contact elements and elements for breaking a contact is shown, and particularly the states of contacts without actuators on the left and with actuators on the right are shown. More particularly, the modified contact elements may have two conductive elements, each of which may be a part of an adjacent contact element. For example, Area  1  may comprise two contact elements, including a first contact element comprising a contact element and a first conductive element of a modified contact element and a second contact element comprising a contact element and a second part of the modified contact element. More particularly, Area  1  comprises contact elements  9602  and  9603  that are electrically connected to a connector  9604  comprising contact elements  9608  and  9610 . Similarly, Area  2  comprises contact elements  9620  and  9622  that are electrically connected to a connector  9606  comprising contact elements  9616  and  9618 . As shown on the right-hand side, the contact elements of the connectors  9604  and  9606  are electrically isolated when the projections  9612  and  9614  are inserted between the contact elements of the connector. 
     A system for controlling the application of power to a load is now described, where control modules of  FIGS.  97 - 106    may be coupled to power adapters of the system, and where power adapter arrangements having up to seven contact elements are now described. Turning first to  FIG.  97   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter comprising an outlet and a standard control module is shown. According to the implementation of  FIG.  97   , a power adapter arrangement  9700  comprises a power adapter  9702  and a control module  9704 . The power adapter  9702  comprises an outlet  9706  and a plurality of contact elements of an electrical interface  606 , including a line (LN) contact element  9722 , a neutral contact element (NEUT)  9724 , and a ground (EGND) contact element  9726  required by the outlet. The control module  9704  comprises contact elements of the electrical interface  630  that are coupled to conductors  9712  and  9714 . The control module  9704  also comprises contact elements that are coupled to corresponding contact elements of the power adapter in the electrical interface  630  for receiving line, neutral and ground voltages. By way of example, a contact element  9730  of the control module is coupled to a contact element  9728  of the power adapter. The power adapter  9702  does not require contact elements associated with the electrical interface other than the contact elements for the line, neutral and ground voltages, but must be able to receive contact elements, such as the load (LD) and switch (SW1 and SW2) contact elements as shown. That is, even though the contact elements associated with the load and switch contact elements are not used, the power adapter  9702  needs to be able to receive a control module having the load and switch contact elements to enable interchangeability, as will be described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  98   . While the control module  9704  does not provide any electrical connections to the power adapter  9702  that are used by the power adapter arrangement but functions as a cover when used with a power adapter having an outlet, the contact elements enable the operation of the switch of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  101    for example, as will be described below in reference to  FIG.  101   . Conductors  9708  and  9710  are provided for enabling the control module  9802  to be used in a power adapter having a switch, such as power adapter  10102  as described below. It should be understood that the power adapter  9702  could be implemented with a separate line input for separately controlling the application of power to the outlet  9706  (to operate outlet  9706  as a switched outlet), as described herein for power adapters having outlets, such as in reference to  FIG.  38    for example. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  98   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  9800  having a power adapter comprising an outlet and a standard outlet module is shown. The control module  9802  comprises a plurality of contact elements (comprising seven contact elements) that provide both conductors  9806  and  9808  for enabling a switching operation of a power adapter having a switch, and contact element that provide power, neutral and ground voltages to an outlet  9810  as shown. While contact elements LD, SW2, SW1 and T2 of the control module  9802  do not provide an electrical connection when connected to the power adapter  9702 , these contact elements enable the transfer of control signals in a multi-way switching arrangement as will be described in more detail below in reference to  FIG.  102   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  99   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  9900  having a power adapter comprising an outlet and a module having a USB connector is shown. The control module  9902  of  FIG.  99    also comprises a plurality of contact elements, including seven contact elements for enabling the operation of both a switch of a power adapter and a circuit requiring power, neutral and ground, shown here by way of example as a USB connector  9906  having elements for charging or data transfer for example. A conductor  9908  provides an electrical connection between the SW2 contact element and the LD contact element, while a conductor  9910  provides an electrical connection from the LN contact element to the SW1 contact element and the USB connector  9906 . While a USC-C connector is shown by way of example, it should be understood that any type of connector for charging, data communication or other electrical functions could be implemented. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  100   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  10000  having a power adapter comprising an outlet and a module having a controlled outlet is shown. According to the implementation of  FIG.  100   , the control module  10002  comprises a plurality of contact elements associated with the electrical interface  630  enabling the coupling of power to the control module. Unlike the fixed outlet of the control module of  FIG.  98   , the control module  10002  comprises a switch  10006 , which may be a relay for example, which controls the application of power applied to an outlet  10008 . A control circuit  10010  is coupled to a wireless communication circuit  10012  for example to control the switch  10006  at a control input  10007 , and therefore control the application of power to the outlet  10008 , where the control circuit may control the application of power to the load by controlling the switch  10006  in response to wireless communication signals received by the wireless communication circuit  10012 . An AC/DC circuit  10014 , also known as a power supply, is coupled to the line voltage to generate a DC voltage, shown here by way of example as a 5 V DC signal, which could be distributed to any circuit elements of the control module that needs the DC signal. It should be understood that the control circuit could also receive external inputs from a user by way of a user interface on the control module, such as a button for enabling a user to manually control the application of power to the outlet  10008 . Conductor elements  10016  and  10018  are provided to enable the routing of signals when the control module  10002  is used in a switch. 
     When the control modules of  FIGS.  97 - 100    are implemented in the power adapter  9702  having an outlet, the control modules receive the power from the power adapter. However, the control modules of  FIGS.  97 - 100    also comprise conductors (e.g., conductors  9712  and  9714 ) that enable a switching operation of a power adapter having a switch, as will be described in more detail in reference to  FIGS.  101 - 104   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  101   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  10100  having a power adapter comprising a switch and a standard module is shown. As shown in the implementation of  FIG.  101   , when the control module  9704  is attached to the power adapter  10102 , the plurality of contact elements  10104  of the electrical interface  630  enable the operation of the switch  10106  to route the line voltage to the load by way of the conductors  9712  and  9714  in response to the switching of the switch  10106 . For example, the line voltage is routed from the line contact element  10108  of the electrical interface  606  through the line contact elements of the electrical interface at  630  to the conductor  9714  and to the switch  10106  by way of the SW1 contact elements of the electrical interface  630 . With the switch in the open state as shown in  FIG.  101   , the line voltage will not be routed through to the load. However, if the switch  10106  is switched to a closed state, the line voltage will be routed through the SW2 contact elements of the electrical interface  630 , the conductor  9712 , and the LD contact elements of the electrical interface  630  to provide the line voltage to the load  314  at the LD contact element  10114 . A contact elements  10110  is provided to receive a neutral voltage and a contact element  10112  is provided to receive a ground voltage. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  102   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  10200  having a plurality of contact elements  1   s  shown. As shown in  FIG.  102   , the contact elements of the plurality of contact elements  9804  not only provide power to the outlet  10008 , but the conductors  9806  and  9808  enable the switching operation of the switch  10106 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  103   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  10300  having a power adapter comprising a switch and a control module having a USB connector is shown. As shown in  FIG.  103   , the contact elements of the plurality of contact elements of the electrical interface  630  not only provide power to the USB connector  9906 , but the conductors  9908  and  9910  enable the switching operation of the switch  10106 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  104   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  10400  having a power adapter having a switch and a control module having a controlled outlet is shown. As shown in  FIG.  104   , the contact elements of the electrical interface  630  not only provide power to the outlet  10008 , but the conductor elements  10016  and  10018  enable the switching operation of the switch  10106 . The operation associated with the switching the power to the load  314  is the same as described above in reference to  FIG.  101   , and the operation associated with switching power to the switched outlet  10008  is the same as described above in reference to  FIG.  100   , which describes the operation of the control module  10002 . 
     According to the implementation of  FIGS.  105  and  106   , control modules for controlling the operation of the switch are shown. Turning to  FIG.  105   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  10500  having a power adapter having a switch and a control module having a circuit for dimming is shown. A control module  10502  comprises a dimmer circuit for controlling the application of power to a load. More particularly, the control module  10502  comprises a plurality of contact elements of the electrical interface  630  that enable the dimming of power to the load. A control circuit  10506  is adapted to receive external dimmer control inputs from an actuator  10508  or from a wireless communication circuit  10510 . The AC/DC circuit  10512  receives the line voltage from the power adapter  10102  and generates a DC voltage for use by other circuit elements of the control module  10502 . A dimmer circuit  10514 , shown here by way of example as a TRIAC circuit, is controlled by the control circuit  10506  to control the power applied to the load. 
     It should be noted that the control module  10502  does not route the power signal through the switch  10106 , but rather routes a signal, which may be a DC signal for example, though the switch  10106  to detect a change in the switch  10106  in response to an actuation by a user. That is, the control circuit  10506  provides a DC signal to the SW2 contact and detects the presence or absence of the DC signal on the SW1 contact element in response to the switching of the switch  10106 . The control circuit also controls the application of the power received by way of the LN contact element and routed to the LD contact element by way of the dimmer circuit  10514 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  106   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  10600  having a power adapter comprising a switch and a control module having a circuit for receiving an external input, such as a motion sensor, is shown. According to the implementation of  FIG.  106   , a control module  10602  comprises a switch  10614  having a control input  10615  adapted to receive a control input from the control circuit  10608  to enable control of the application of power to the load. More particularly, the control module  10602  comprises a plurality of contact elements associated with the electrical interface  630  enabling application of the power to the load by routing the power through the control module  10602 . The control module does not route the power signal through the switch  10106 , but rather routes a DC signal though the switch  10106  to detect a change in the switch in response to an actuation by a user as described in reference to  FIG.  105   . That is, the control circuit  10608  provides a DC signal to the SW2 contact element and detects the presence or absence of the DC signal on the SW1 contact element in response to the switching of the switch  10106 . The control circuit also controls the application of the power received by way of the LN contact element and routed to the LD contact element in response to a signal receive by circuit  10610  for receiving an external input. It should be noted that the control module  10602  may receive an external input for controlling the switch  10614  from one or more of a variety of circuits, such as a motion sensor, a wireless communication circuit, or an external input from a user for example. An AC/DC circuit  10616  is also provided to provide a DC signal used by circuits in the control module. 
     According to another implementation, communication between power adapter arrangements may be achieved over a traveler line between the power adapter arrangements, as will be described in more detail in reference to  FIGS.  107 - 120   . A block diagram of the system  10700  of  FIG.  107    comprises a load-side power adapter and one or more additional power adapters that transfer communication signals with the load side power adapter by way of a traveler line, where the one or more additional power adapters may be called remote or companion power adapters. The communication signals may comprise requests, commands, acknowledgement, status information, control signals or any other information enabling a control module or a pair of control modules to operate in a multi-way wiring arrangement. According to the system of  FIG.  107   , the power adapter  10702  coupled to the load, which may be considered a master power adapter, is implemented in a location wired to receive the line voltage and be coupled to the load, and another type of power adapter  10704 , which may be considered a remote or companion power adapter, is implemented at another location of a multi-way switching arrangement, where a multi-way switching arrangement may comprise a 3-way switching, 4-way switching, or a greater number of switches in a switching arrangement for example. 
     Each of the power adapters is coupled to a plurality of signal lines  10710  comprising a first signal line having a traveler (TR) line  10712  coupled between at least two power adapters, and more particularly between the power adapter  10702  and the power adapter  10704 . The traveler line  10712  may also be coupled to any other power adapter  10705  in a multiway switching arrangement. The plurality of signal lines  10710  may also comprise signal lines coupled to the line, neutral and ground voltages, including for example a signal line  10714  adapted to receive a line voltage, a neutral voltage line  10716  and a ground voltage line  10718 . The plurality of signal lines  10710  may comprise wires between junction boxes and accessible from a junction box as described in  FIG.  1    and coupled to contact elements of the electrical interface  606  of a power adapter for example. While a particular set of signal lines is shown for the plurality of signal lines  10710 , it should be understood that the requirements for signal lines may be regulated by local and national codes, where line, neutral and ground may be required to be routed to each junction box having a switch for example, or other signal lines may be required. 
     Each power adapter of the system  10700  is coupled to receive the line (LN) voltage by way of the signal line  10714  to enable powering the power adapter or a control module attached to the power adapter. Each of the power adapters of the system  10700  may be coupled to the neutral voltage by way of the neutral voltage line  10716  and the ground voltage by way of the ground voltage line  10718 . Each of the power adapters is also configured to be coupled to the traveler line  10712  to transmit and/or receive control signals. Communication signals placed on the traveler line  10712  and communicated to control modules may comprise control signals that may be generated by one or both of a toggle switch  10706  (i.e., an on/off switch) or a dimmer actuator  10708  (i.e., one or more switches to control the level of dimming for the load). While power control and dimming actuators are shown, it should be understood that other user interface elements could be implemented on any of the power adapters  10702  or  10704  (or any additional power adapter  10705  shown in  FIG.  107    as implementing a 4-way circuit). It should be noted that any number of additional power adapters  10705  could be implemented, and that the power adapters may be implemented without dimming actuators, where any dimming could be controlled by a dimmer circuit in a control module, as will be described in more detail below in reference to  FIGS.  110  and  111   . 
     The power adapters of the system  10700  may also comprise control modules. As shown in  FIG.  107   , the power adapter  10702  comprises a control module  10720 , the power adapter  10704  comprises a cover  10722 , and the power adapter  10705  comprises a control module  10720 . As will be described in more detail below, the power adapters may operate without any control module, and therefore just have a cover  10722 . However, each of the power adapters of the system  10700  may be coupled to a control module. Dashed lines are shown to the power adapter  10705  to show that a 3-way switching arrangement can be implemented having only power adapter  10702  and power adapter  10704  or may include any number of additional power adapters  10705 . That is, because the communication to the power adapter  10702  is provided on a traveler line, the signals from multiple remote power adapters, such as  10704  and  10705  as shown, could provide signals on the same traveler line that is coupled to the power adapter  10702 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  108   , a block diagram of a multi-way switching configuration  10800  having a power adapter  10702  (i.e., a load-side power adapter) and a power adapter  10704  (i.e., a companion power adapter) is shown. According to the configuration of the system of  FIG.  108   , the power adapter  10704 , which would be implemented at a location other than the location providing power to a load, comprises a plurality of contact elements  10804 , including contact elements for line, neutral and ground for providing reference voltages to a control module coupled to the power adapter  10704  and a contact element for receiving control signals from a control module coupled to the power adapter  10704  or from some other device by way of the traveler line  10712 . 
     More particularly, the plurality of contact elements  10804  associated with the electrical interface  630  comprises a first contact element  10856  associated with the traveler line, a second contact element  10858  associated with the line voltage, a third contact element  10860  associated with the neutral voltage, and a fourth contact element  10862  associated with a ground voltage. 
     The electrical interface  606  of the power adapter  10704  comprises a contact element  10840  adapted to receive a ground voltage, a contact element  10842  adapted to receive a neutral voltage, a contact element  10844  adapted receive a line voltage, and a contact element  10846  adapted to be coupled to a traveler, and particularly traveler  10712  is shown. 
     The electrical interface  606  of the power adapter  10702  comprises a contact element  10848  adapted to be coupled to a traveler, a contact element  10850  adapted to receive a line voltage, a contact element  10852  adapted to receive a neutral voltage, and a contact element  10854  adapted to receive a ground voltage. A lines  10857  is provided as a part of wiring from the power adapter  10702  to provide power to the load  314 . 
     The power adapter  10704  may also comprise actuators adapted to enable a user to control the application of power to a load. According to the implementation of  FIG.  108   , the power adapter  10704  comprises a switch  10806 , which may be a momentary switch or contact switch (i.e., enabling movement from a resting state and returned to a resting state after actuation) coupled to the line voltage for generating a pulse at the output of a signal generator  10808 , which may be a diode rectifier or some other circuit for generating a pulse or some other signal indicating an actuation of the switch  10806  by a user engaging an actuator  10807  for example. The power adapter may optionally include a dimmer actuator  10810  coupled to the line voltage and adapted to generate a dimming signal at the output of a second signal generator  10812 , which may also be a diode rectifier. The outputs of the signal generators  10808  and  10812  are coupled to the traveler line  10712  to apply any control signals on the traveler line, where the control signals can be processed by the power adapter  10702  or a control module attached to the power adapter  10702  or on a control module coupled to the power adapter  10704 , as will be described in more detail below. 
     The power adapter  10702  comprises a plurality of contact elements  10814  that also comprise contact elements for receiving the line, neutral and ground voltages, and a contact element for receiving control signals on the traveler line. More particularly, the plurality of contact elements  10814  comprises a first contact element  10864  adapted to receive a traveler signal from the traveler line, a contact element  10866  adapted to receive the line voltage, a contact element  10868  adapted to receive the neutral voltage, and a contact element  10870  adapted to receive the ground voltage. It should be understood that the plurality of contact elements  10804  could be implemented on a PCB or other type of circuit board, or could comprise connectors having contact elements, such as a piece of formed metal that couples a contact element of the electrical interface  606  or a signal generator  10808  or  10812  to a contact element of the plurality of contact elements  10804 . Similarly, the plurality of contact elements  10814  could be implemented as formed metal parts, or on a printed circuit board having other components of the power adapter  10702 . 
     The power adapter  10702  may also comprise actuators for generating control signals that may be placed on the traveler line and routed to circuits of the power adapter  10702 , including an actuator for one or both on/off control and dimming control. More particularly, a switch  10816  having an actuator element  10817  accessible by a user is coupled to a signal generator  10818 , which may also be a diode rectifier or some other device for generating a pulse or some other signal for example, to generate a toggle control signal. A dimming actuator  10820  is coupled to the line voltage and adapted to generate a dimming signal at the output of a second signal generator  10822 , which may also be a diode rectifier or some other device for generating a pulse or some other signal for example. According to one implementation, the signal generators  10818  and  10822  may comprise different devices to generate different signals that are detected by a control circuit  10824  of the power adapter  10702  or a control module coupled to the power adapter  10702 . While a single dimming actuator  10820  is shown, it should be understood that separate dimming actuators and signal generators could be provided for both the increase (i.e., up) and decrease (i.e., down) functionalities associated with dimming. 
     A control circuit  10824  is coupled to the traveler line to receive signals from the power adapter  10704 , the switch  10816 , the dimming actuator  10820 , or from a control module attached to either of the power adapters  10704  or  10702 . A dimmer signaling circuit  10826  may be coupled between the traveler line  10712  and the control circuit  10824  to provide decoded dimming signals to the control circuit. The contact element  10822  is also directly coupled to the control circuit  10824  as shown. It should be noted that the dimmer signaling circuit  10826  and the dimmer actuator and dimmer signal generators are optionally included and could be eliminated from both power adapters  10702  and  10704  of  FIG.  108    without additional changes to  FIG.  108   , where dimming functionality could be implemented by a dimmer actuator and dimmer signal generator implemented in a control module. That is, the dimming control signals could be provided to the traveler line by a control module attached to one or both of power adapters  10702  and  10704  as shown in  FIGS.  110  and  111   . 
     The control circuit  10824  may provide a control signal to a register  10828 , which may be a flip-flop for example for storing a state signal to control the state of the switch  10830 . The register controls the application of power to the load when the power adapter is not operating as a dimmer, in which case the dimmer would be turned off, such as by using a control signal from the control circuit to a control signal input  10833  of the dimmer to block any current path through the dimmer. The control circuit  10824  may also provide control signals to the dimmer circuit  10832  to control the application of power to the load when the power adapter is operating as a dimmer, in which case the switch  10830  would be off or disabled (i.e., an open circuit) such as by using a control signal to a control signal input  10831 . A voltage divider  10834  is also provided at the output of a rectifier  10836  to generate the reference voltage V Mid  shown in  FIG.  109   . The reference voltage V Mid  enables the detection of whether power is applied to a load in response to the generation of a toggle signal, as shown in  FIG.  109   . An AC/DC circuit  10838  is provided to generate a DC signal for circuits of the power adapter. 
     In order to achieve interchangeability for the power adapter arrangements of  FIGS.  107 - 120   , the power adapters are able to receive contact elements of a control module even if the power adapter does not include a corresponding contact element for receiving a contact element that may be present in the control module. Therefore, in order to implement either of the power adapters  10702  and  10704  used in a multi-way switching arrangement or a single pole, single throw (SPST) switch as described in  FIGS.  111  and  112   , locations for receiving six contact elements may be provided in the power adapters  10702  and  10704  even if not all of the contact elements of control module make an electrical connection to the power adapter. As will be described in more detail below, only three contact elements are required in the electrical interface  630  of a power adapter having an outlet, four contact elements are required in the electrical interface  630  of the power adapters  10702  and  10704  used in a multi-way switching arrangement, and six contact elements are required in the electrical interface  630  for a single pole, single throw (SPST) switch as described in  FIGS.  111  and  112   . Therefore, all of the power adapters associated with the implementation of  FIGS.  107 - 120    may be adapted to receive six contact elements of a control module to ensure interchangeability. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  109   , a block diagram shows one example of the operation of the power adapter  10704  for sending a switching signal on the traveler line, such as to the load side power adapter on the traveler line. A line voltage received at the contact element  10842  is provided to an input  10902  of the switch  10806 , an output of which generated an output  10904  is coupled to an input  10906  of the signal generator  10808 . A pulse is generated in output  10908  of the rectifier and provided to the traveler contact element  10846 . As can be seen, a pulse is detected when a V HI  signal is generated based upon a closing of the switch  10806  by a user pressing actuator  10807 . The voltage on the traveler line will be at 0 V when power is not applied to the load, or at V Mid  when power is applied to the load, where the voltage V Mid  is generated by the voltage divider  10834 . The voltage V Hi  is generated at the output of the signal generator  10808  in response to the actuation of the switch, and then the voltage on the traveler line remains at V Mid  while power is applied to the load (i.e., the light is on). When the switch  10806  is actuated again to turn off the load, another pulse is generated having the voltage V Hi , and the voltage on the traveler line then returns to 0V as shown. It should be noted that the operation described in reference to  FIG.  109    could apply to any of the contact switches, such as switch  10806  and  10816 ) of the power adapters of  FIG.  108   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  110   , a system  11000  having a pair of power adapter arrangements comprising a remote power adapter  11001  and a power adapter  11002  without dimming control and no control modules attached to the power adapters is shown. According to the implementation of  FIG.  110   , the dimmer actuator  10810  and signal generator  10812  of the power adapter  10704  and the dimming actuator  10820  and signal generator  10822  of the power adapter  10702  are eliminated, and any dimmer signaling (i.e., the generation of dimmer signals) would be provided by signal provided on the traveler line by a control module having dimmer circuits, as will be a described for example in  FIG.  116   . The operation of the system  11000  is the same as described above in reference to  FIG.  108    except that any dimming signal detected by the dimmer signaling circuit  10826  is generated by a control module attached to one of the power adapters, where the control circuit controls the dimming to the light using the dimmer circuit  10832  as described above. 
     While the system  11000  of  FIG.  110    provides a simplification over the multi-way switching configuration  10800 , the system  11100  of  FIG.  111    provides a further simplification and eliminates the dimming functionality from the power adapter  11002 . As shown in  FIG.  111   , a system having a pair of power adapter arrangements without dimming control and control modules attached is shown. The arrangement of  FIG.  111    is beneficial because in many cases, a user may not desire to have dimming functionality. Accordingly, the power adapter  11102  has reduced components (i.e., no longer has dimmer signaling circuit  10826  and dimmer circuit  10832 ) and only provides switching functionality. The voltage divider  10834  and the rectifier  10836 , which may be included to provide an indication of the state of the power to a load, may also be eliminated. That is, the power adapter  11002  may be modified to enable a control module to control the application of the power to the load using a dimmer circuit of the control module as will be described in more detail below in reference to  FIG.  116   . 
     Additional modifications to power adapters having switches may eliminate the need for a control module for a single switch or provide additional functionality related to dimming control using control modules, as will be described in more detail in reference to  FIGS.  112 - 120   . Turning first to  FIG.  112   , a block diagram shows a modification of a power adapter  11202  having a switch and a control module  11203 . According to one implementation, by providing connectors which have contact elements that break a connection within the power adapter or by providing switches within the power adapter, it is possible to eliminate the need for the control module  11203  for the power adapter  11202 , and also reduce the number of locations of contact elements required for the group of power adapters to 6. That is, the T2 contact element of the power adapter  10102  may be eliminated, and the TR contact element may be used for routing both AC signals and DC signals, based upon the type of control module that is attached to the power adapter, as described in reference to  FIGS.  113 - 120   . 
     Describing first the arrangement of the power adapter arrangement  11200 , the electrical interface  606  comprises a contact element  11204  for receiving a line voltage, a contact element  11206  for receiving a neutral voltage, a contact element  11208  for receiving a ground voltage, and a contact element  11210  for providing power to a load. The electrical interface  630  comprises a contact element  11212  for providing a signal to the load  314 , a contact element  11214  for receiving a signal from the switch  10106 , a contact element  11216  for providing a signal to the switch  10106 , which may comprise an AC signal or a DC signal, a contact element  11218  for receiving a line voltage, a contact element  11220  for receiving a neutral voltage, and a contact element  11222  for receiving the ground voltage. The control module  11203  comprises a corresponding plurality of contact elements  11223  in the electrical interface  630 , and also comprises a conductor element  11226  adapted to route signal between contact element  11214  and the contact element  11216 . A conductor element  11228  is adapted to route a line voltage signal from the contact element  11218  to the contact element  11216 . It should be noted the power adapter  11202  could be used with control modules receiving line, neutral and ground voltages, or control modules that control dimming and switching, such as control modules  10502  and  10602 . 
     The electrical interface  606  of a power adapter  11224 , which includes modifications to the power adapter  11202 , comprises a contact element  11230  adapted to receive a line voltage, a contact element  11231  adapted to receive a neutral voltage, a contact element  11234  adapted to receive a ground voltage, and a contact element  11236  adapted to provide power to a load. The electrical interface  630  comprises a plurality of contact elements adapted to receive corresponding contact elements of a control module, including a contact element  11250  adapted to provide power to a load, a contact element  11252  adapted to provide a signal to the switch  10106 , a contact element  11254  adapted to receive a signal from the switch  10106 , a contact element  11256  adapted to receive a line voltage, a contact element  11258  adapted to receive a neutral voltage, and a contact element  11260  adapted to receive a ground voltage. 
     However, the power adapter  11202  can be modified according to some implementations as shown to eliminate the need for the control module  11203 . More particularly, the power adapter  11224  is a modified power adapter based upon power adapter  11202  but includes connectors  11238  and  11240  to eliminate the need for a standard control module, allowing a cover  11232  to be optionally used in its place. The connector  11238  comprises a first contact element  11242  and a second contact element  11244  that are electrically connected to enable the transfer of voltage and current from a terminal of the switch  10106  to which the contact element  11244  is connected to the contact element  11236  to which the contact element  11242  is connected. The connector  11240  comprises a first contact element  11246  and a second contact element  11248  that are electrically connected to enable the transfer of voltage and current from the line contact element  11230  to which the contact element  11248  is connected to the other terminal of the switch to which the contact element  11246  is connected. Accordingly, the connectors  11238  and  11240  enable the routing of current from the contact element  11230  to the load by way of the switch  10106  without the use of a control module. 
     For each of the connectors  11238  and  11240 , the contact elements of the connectors can be separated by an actuator of a control module to enable the routing of the line voltage through the control module to the load, as described above in reference to  FIGS.  95  and  96    and in more detail in reference to  FIGS.  113  and  114   . The power adapter  11224  also comprises a plurality of openings, such as openings in a housing as will be described in more detail below, for receiving actuators of a control module. The power adapter  11224  may comprise a first opening  11262  coupled to receive an actuator for breaking an electrical connection between the contact elements  11242  and  11244 , and a second opening  11264  for receiving an actuator for breaking an electrical connection between to the contact elements  11246  and  11248 . While only two openings are shown by way of example, it should be understood that additional openings could be provided, such as three openings as described in reference to  FIG.  116   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  113   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  11300  having a switch and a module having a switching circuit and wireless control is shown. When a control module providing switching functionality, such as a switch that may be wirelessly controlled or a switch having a motion sensor for example, is coupled to the power adapter, an actuator element  11319  is used to open the connector  11238  and an actuator element  11320  is used to open the connector  11240  (i.e., break the electrical connections between the contact elements of connectors) as shown, allowing the control module to control the application of power from the line contact to the load contact. The switch  10106  is now used to route a DC signal to detect an actuation of the switch  10106  by a user engaging an actuator on the power adapter  11224 . A control circuit  11304  is coupled to a signal detector  11306 , which may be a voltage detector for example, to detect a switching of the switch  10106 . A signal detector  11308 , which may be a pulse detector for example, is used to detect a signal on the traveler (TR) contact element of the electrical interface  630  when the control module  11302  is used in a power adapter  11224  for example. The operation of the signal detector  11308  enables the use of the control module  11302  with a power adapter associated with a multi-way power adapter arrangement by detecting a signal such as a pulse on a traveler line, as will be described in more detail in reference to  FIGS.  115 - 120   . According to the implementation of  FIG.  113   , the control circuit  11304  controls the switch  11314  by a control signal provided to a control input  11313  of the switch  11314  to control the path of the line voltage received at an input of the switch  11314  to an output of the switch coupled to the LD contact element of the electrical interface  630  coupled to a load through the power adapter  11224  as shown. The switch  11314  may comprise a relay or a solid-state switching device for example. An optional wireless communication circuit  11310  or a circuit  11312  for receiving an external input (e.g., a signal from a motion sensor or an input by a user on a user interface of the power adapter) may be coupled to the control circuit  11304  to control the application of power to the load by way of the switch  11314 . An AC/DC circuit  11316  is also provided to provide a DC signal for the control module. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  114   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  11400  having a switch and a control module having a dimmer circuit with wireless control is shown. The control module  11402  of  FIG.  114    is similar to the control module  11302 , except that the switch  11314  also provides dimming functionality. More particularly, the switch  11314  comprises a switch  11403  coupled to receive a switching control signal at an input  11404  and a dimmer circuit  11406  coupled to receive a dimming control signal at an input  11407 . While both a dimmer circuit and a switch are shown, it should be understood that the switch could be eliminated by using a dimmer circuit that can operate as a switch to enable an on/off function of the control module. A dimmer transmitter and receiver circuit  11410  is coupled to the control circuit  11304  to receive a dimming control signal from a dimmer actuator  11412  generated in response to an actuation by a user. It should be noted that the power adapter  11224  could be implemented with any control module that does not control switching of the power to a load, but only receives the line, neutral and ground voltages as will be described in more detail below. 
     While examples of switching in  FIGS.  113  and  114    are provided by way of example, it should be understood that control modules having other functionality related to switching, such as motion detection, or other functionality associated with DC circuits could also be implemented. For example, a control module  12002  of  FIG.  120    could be implemented with the power adapter  11224 , where only a single actuator would break the connection for the connector  11238 , and the line power would be routed from the line contact element through the switch  10106  to the control module  12002 , as shown in  FIG.  120   . That is, the line power would be provided to the control module  12002  and the output dimmed signal would be provided to the load contact element and the load. 
     As described above in reference to  FIGS.  112 - 114   , a power adapter that is configured to be used in a power adapter arrangement that can operate as a switch without a control module, as will be described in reference to  FIGS.  115 - 120   . That is, a power adapter such as the power adapter  10702  of  FIG.  110    for example could be modified to include connectors that allow the power adapter to be used without a control module, but may include a cover. Turning first to  FIG.  115   , a block diagram of a power adapter  11501  in a multi-way switching arrangement  11500 , provided here by way of example as a 3-way switching arrangement is shown. The electrical interface  606  comprises a first contact element  11502  that may be coupled to receive a line voltage, a second contact element  11503  adapted to be coupled to a traveler line, a third contact element  11504  adapted to be coupled to a load, a fourth contact element  11505  adapted to receive a neutral voltage, and a fifth contact element  11506  adapted to receive a ground voltage. As shown in the implementation of  FIG.  115   , neither power adapter  11001  nor power adapter  11501  is coupled to a control module. A signal detector  11507  of the power adapter  11501  (which may be a pulse detector for example) will detect the actuation of the actuator  10807  of the switch  10806  of the power adapter  11001  or actuator  11519  of the power adapter  11501  to control the state of the switch  11510  and therefore the power to the load. 
     According to the implementation of  FIG.  115   , a signal detector  11507  is coupled to the traveler line by way of the contact element  11503  and may receive a signal from the switch of the power adapter  11001 , from a control module attached to the power adapter  11001  and providing a signal on the traveler line by way of the electrical interface  630 , from the switch  11520  of the power adapter  11501 , or from a control module attached to the power adapter  11501 . The signal detector  11507  provides a signal to the register  11508 , which stores the signaled to control the state of the switch  11510 , and particularly for routing the line voltage received at the contact element  11502  from an input  11511  to an output  11512  of the switch  11510  in response to a control signal received at a control input  11513 . The power adapter may also include openings  11526  and  11528 . 
     The electrical interface  630  comprises a contact element  10116  coupled to the load contact element  11504  (and the contact element  11530  of the connector  11514 ), a contact element  10118  coupled to the node ND1 (and both the second connector of the contact element  11514  and the output  11512  of the switch  11510 ), a contact element  10120  coupled to the traveler contact element  11503 , a contact element  10122  coupled to the line contact element  11502 , a contact element  10124  coupled to the neutral contact element  10505 , and a contact element  10126  coupled to the ground contact element  11506 . When no control module is attached to the electrical interface  630 , the output  11512  of the switch  11510  is coupled directly to load contact element  11504  without making an electrical connection to any other element. The traveler contact element  11503  is coupled to the traveler contact element  10120 , but does not make an electrical connect to any other contact element of the electrical interface  630 . 
     In a similar manner as discussed above in reference to  FIG.  110   , the power adapter  11202  can be modified according to some implementations to eliminate the need for the control module  11203 . More particularly, portions of the electrical interface  630  of the power adapter  11501  are modified to include connectors  11514  and  11516  to eliminate the need for a standard control module, allowing a cover  11232  to be optionally used in its place. 
     The connector  11514  comprises a first contact element  11530  and a second contact element  11532  that are electrically connected to enable the transfer of voltage and current from a node (ND1) coupled to the SW contact element  10118  (i.e., a node where the contact element  11532 , contact element  11534  and the SW contact element  10118  are all electrically connected) to which the contact element  11532  is connected to the contact element  11504  to which the contact element  11530  is connected. 
     The connector  11516  comprises a first contact element  11534  and a second contact element  11536  that are electrically connected to enable the transfer of voltage and current from the output  11512  of the switch  11510  to which the contact element  11536  is connected to the node ND1 to which the contact element  11534  is connected. Accordingly, the connectors  11514  and  11516  enable the routing of current from the switch  11510  to the load without the use of a control module. 
     For each of the connectors  11514  and  11516 , the contact elements of the connectors can be separated by an actuator, such as an actuator of a control module, to enable the routing of the line voltage through the control module to the load, as described above in reference to  FIGS.  95  and  96    and  FIGS.  113  and  114   . The power adapter  11501  also comprises a plurality of openings  11526  and  11528 , such as openings in a housing as will be described in more detail below, for receiving actuators of a control module. That is, the power adapter  11501  comprises a first opening  11526  coupled to receive an actuator for breaking an electrical connection between the contact elements  11530  and  11532 , and a second opening  11528  for receiving an actuator for breaking an electrical connection between contact elements  11534  and  11536 . While only two openings are shown by way of example, it should be understood that additional openings could be provided, such as three openings as described in reference to  FIG.  116   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  116   , a block diagram of a power adapter having a dimming module in a 3-way switching arrangement  11600  is shown. The dimming control module is used with the power adapter  11501  that is attached to the load to control the application of the power to the load. As can be seen, the actuator element  11319  opens the connector  11514  and the actuator element  11320  opens the connector  11516 . Accordingly, the power adapter arrangement comprising the power adapter  11501  and the control module  11402  operates similar to the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  113   . More particularly, when both connectors  11514  and  11516  are open, the switch  11510  does not operate in the power adapter arrangement, and the application of power applied to the load is controlled by the control module which receives the line voltage at the LN contact element of the electrical interface  630  and the switch  11403  is controlled to provide power to the LD contact element of the electrical interface and applied to the load at contact element  11504 . That is, the output  11512  of the switch is completely isolated from the contact element  11504 . The control module  11402  will receive the line voltage, and the load voltage, and will receive signals on the traveler contact element TR of the electrical interface  630 . Therefore, the control module will respond to any toggling of the switch  11518  of the power adapter  11501  or a toggling of the switch  10806  of the power adapter  11001 . However, as will be described in reference to  FIG.  120   , only the connector  11514  is open when a different type of dimmer circuit is used. 
     It should be noted that a third actuator  11602  may be implemented to enable compatibility with power adapter  11224  implementing a single switch, such as the power adapter shown in  FIG.  112   . That is, it may be beneficial to implement the control modules where the opening  11528  of the power adapter  11501  does not align with the opening  11264  of the power adapter  11224 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  117   , a block diagram of a 3-way switching arrangement  11700  having a dimmer module on both a companion power adapter and the load side power adapter is shown. It should be noted that the control module  11402  coupled to the power adapter  11501  will control the power to the load, while the control module  11402  coupled to the power adapter  11001  will only transmit dimming signals on the traveler that are detected and processed by the control module  11402  coupled to the power adapter  11501 . 
     Turning now to  118 , a block diagram of a 3-way switching arrangement  11800  having a wirelessly controlled switch module on a companion power adapter is shown. The control module  11302 , does not operate to control the application of power to load, but rather for purposes of sending signals on the traveler line, such as an actuation signal received by a user selecting an actuator of power adapter  11001  or  11501 , or some other signal, such as a signal received by the wireless communication circuit. It should be noted that any signal generated on the traveler line  10710  by the control module  11302  is detected by the signal detector. Because a control module is not attached to the power adapter  11501 , only an actuation associated with toggling the switch  11510  will be performed by the power adapter  11501 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  119   , a block diagram of a 3-way switching arrangement  11900  having a wirelessly controlled switch module on a companion power adapter is shown. When the control module  11302  is coupled the power adapter  11501 , the switch  11314  of the control module  11302  controls the application of the power to the load. The switching control module  11302  may be a control module having wireless connectivity or a motion sensor for example as an external input. Control signals for controlling the application of power to the load can be detected by a signal detector, such as the signal detector  11306  which may be adapted to detect a pulse associated with an actuation of a switch (e.g., a togging of a switch of the power adapters  11001  and  11501 ) or signal detector  11308  which may detect a dimming signal or some other signal. While two signal detectors are shown, such as one for detecting a pulse associated with a togging of a switch of the power adapters  11001  and  11501 , it should be understood that a single detector could be used, or signals could be detected directly by the control circuit. That is, as in the implementation of  FIG.  119   , the output  11512  of the switch  11510  is isolated from the LD contact element  11504 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  120   , a block diagram of a 3-way switching arrangement  12000  having control module  12002  on a load side power adapter is shown. The control module  12002  controls the dimming functionality directly to the load. The control module  12002  comprises a dimmer not requiring an AC/DC circuit, and therefore does not require the line voltage. The dimmer circuit comprises a TRIAC  12004 , a capacitor  12006 , and a variable resistor  12008  as described above. A single actuator  12014  is provided to break the electrical connection of the contact elements of the connector  11514 . Therefore, the output of the switch  11510  is not provided to the LD contact element  11504 , but rather provided to the control module  12002  by way of the SWC contact element of the electrical interface  630 . While the switch  11510  controls the application of power to the control module  12002 , the control module  12002  controls application of the dimmed power signal to the LD contact element of the electrical interface  630 . 
     As with any manufactured product, it is beneficial to minimize the amount of materials used during the manufacture of the product, minimize the amount of wasted materials used during the manufacture of the product, and minimize the amount of material that may eventually end up on a landfill if the product is discarded. For some consumer products, the effect of the overall volume of the product can depend on the environment in which the product is used. For example, if the product is installed, any effect of the volume and shape of the product during the installation process may depend upon the volume of the junction box used and the number of wires in the junction box. The design of power adapters and the control modules, individually and in combination, reduce the amount of material required, both from the standpoint of material required during the manufacture of power adapters and control modules and the amount of room of the junction box that it occupied by the power adapter. As will be described in more detail below, the power adapter arrangements minimize the volume of the junction box occupied by the power adapter arrangement, making the installation process of the power adapter arrangement easier for an electrician. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  121   , a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter and a control module comprising an outlet is shown with a wall plate. The expanded view  12100  of the power adapter arrangement and wall plate of  FIG.  121    comprises a standard outlet control module  12102  having an outlet and a power adapter  12104  having an outlet, and a wall plate  12106 . Rather than receiving a control module, the power adapter may instead receive a cover, as will be described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  126   . The standard outlet control module  12102  comprises a front surface  12108  having openings of the outlet for receiving prongs of a plug and enabling the electrical connection of the prongs to contact elements of the control module, as will be described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  122   . More particularly, the openings may comprise an opening  12110  for receiving a neutral contact of a plug which provides power to a load, an opening  12112  for receiving a power contact of a plug that receives a line voltage, and an opening  12114  for receiving a ground contact of a plug that receives a ground voltage. 
     The standard outlet control module  12102  may also comprise a latch. According to one implementation, a latch  12115  may comprise a planar surface  12116 , an end  12117  which can be pushed to allow the latch to rotate and allow the opposite end  12118  and a grip portion  12120  of the latch to be exposed. The grip portion  12120  enables a user to grip the latch and remove the control module by pulling the standard outlet control module  12102  from the power adapter  12104 . The latch  12115  also comprises an opening  12122  that leads to a guide  12124  for receiving a corresponding latch element of the power adapter  12104  (shown as latch element  12561  in  FIG.  125    or latch element  12810  of  FIG.  128    for example) to retain the control module in the power adapter. The guide may be implemented as a channel, having walls on two sides for receiving an attachment element of the power adapter as show, or may be a guide having a single wall as will be described in more detail below. 
     The latch  12115  is movably coupled to a body portion including a front housing  12109  of the control module by an attachment element  12126 , such as a screw or rivet for example, which may comprise a metal or plastic material. The body portion may also comprise a rear housing  12111 . The rear housing  12111  comprises a top portion  12250  and a bottom portion  12252  (as shown in  FIG.  122   ) that creates an indented portion  12186  that reduces the volume of the control module. That is, the depth D 2  of the lower portion is less than the depth D 1  of the upper portion because the standard outlet control module  12102  does not require the additional space. However, control modules may require the additional space as will be described in more detail below, and D 2  will be greater than D 1 . 
     When the latch  12115  is rotated (e.g., clockwise as shown in  FIG.  123   ), the opening  12122  is aligned with a corresponding guide  12128  of the body portion. The guide may comprise a channel, and lead to an opening of a corresponding guide of the latch. That is, the opening  12122  aligns with the guide  12128  so that a latch element (shown as latch element  12561  in  FIG.  125    or latch element  12810  of  FIG.  10    for example) of the power adapter may extend through the guide  12128  of the front and rear housing and the opening  12122  and into the guide  12124 . When the latch  12115  is rotated back counterclockwise, the latch element of the power adapter travels through the guide to the end  12127  of the guide opposite the opening  12122 , causing the control module to be secured to the power adapter. While the latch  12115  is one type of latch that is shown by way of example, it should be understood that other types of latches could be implemented to attach the control module to the power adapter. The control module has a height H1 and a width W1, which is the same width as the housing portion  12150 . When the control module is inserted into the power adapter, the control module and the housing portion  12150  occupy the opening  12184  of the wall plate. The control module extends from the top of the latch  12115  to the bottom  12169  of the control module. 
     Various control modules may also comprise contact elements for establishing electrical connections, and actuator elements, as will be described in more detail below in reference to  FIGS.  135  and  136   . The actuator elements may comprise elements for breaking a connection between contact elements of a power adapter or engaging a corresponding actuator element of a tamper resistance element associated with a power adapter to enable electrical connections between contact elements of the control module and the power adapter, as will be described in more detail below in reference to  FIGS.  135  and  136   . The standard outlet control module  12102  comprises an outlet for example and may not require any actuator elements for breaking a connection between contact elements of a power adapter. For example, if the control module is not used for controlling the application of power to a load in a power adapter having a switch, actuator elements for breaking a connection between contact elements of a power adapter may not be required. That is, some control modules may be passive control modules that do not affect switching of a load controlled by a power adapter having a switch. 
     An actuator element for breaking a connection may comprise projections, such as a non-conductive projection for engaging with contact elements of the power adapter to break an electrical connection between two contact elements of the power adapter. More particularly, the contact elements of the control module enable an electrical connection to a contact element of the power adapter, while the actuator elements may comprise projections or prongs, which may be formed of a plastic material or some other insulating material, which break connections between contact elements of the power adapter. Alternatively, the actuator element may engage a switch of the power adapter to change a state of the switch, such as a mechanical or electrical switch, and change the electrical circuit configuration, such as by breaking an electrical connection of the power adapter. An actuator element that is used to change an electrical circuit configuration of a power adapter may comprise any element that engages a corresponding element of the power adapter to change the electrical circuit configuration. 
     According to some implementations, an actuator element for engaging a tamper resistance element associated with a power adapter may move the tamper resistance element of the power adapter (e.g., a shutter element having openings for receiving contact elements of the control module) that is used to cover contact elements of the power adapter to prevent any inadvertent contact with a contact element coupled to a line contact element or a neutral contact element that provides a return current path or a high voltage contact element, such as a contact element receiving a 120 V AC power signal, as will be described in more detail below. 
     As shown in  FIG.  121   , the standard outlet control module  12102  comprises a contact element  12130  for receiving a neutral voltage (e.g., a contact element coupled to a contact element of the power adapter receiving the neutral voltage from the junction box), a contact element  12132  for receiving a ground voltage (e.g., a contact element coupled to the ground contact element of the power adapter that receives a ground voltage of the junction box), and a contact element  12134  for receiving a power voltage (e.g., a contact element coupled to a contact element receiving the AC power line voltage from a power line of the junction box). 
     The standard outlet control module  12102  also comprises an actuator  12136  that is adapted to engage a tamper resistance element of the power adapter  12104  and move the tamper resistance element to enable the contact elements  12130 ,  12132  and  12134  of the control module to engage corresponding contact elements of the power adapter. That is, a tamper resistance element is designed to prevent inadvertent contact with one or more power contact elements of the power adapter (e.g., line and neutral contact elements) when the control module is removed but enable connections between contact elements of the control module and contact elements of the power adapter when the control module is attached to the power adapter. Additional details related to the contact elements and actuator elements of the standard outlet control module  12102  will be provided below in reference to  FIGS.  135  and  136   . 
     The power adapter  12104  comprises a yoke  12140 , also known as a strap, which enables the power adapter to be secured to a junction box in a wall for example. The yoke comprises flanges  12141  on the top and bottom as shown as having threaded portions  12144  for receiving screws for securing a wall plate to the power adapter and openings  12146  for receiving screws for securing the power adapter to a junction box. The yoke  12140  is generally positioned between a rear housing  12148  and a front housing portion  12150  that may comprise openings for receiving prongs of the plug that make an electrical connection to corresponding contact elements of the power adapter. More particularly, the front housing portion  12150  may comprise a first opening  12152  for receiving a neutral prong of a plug and opening  12154  for receiving a power prong (e.g., line voltage prong) of the plug, and an opening  12156  for receiving a ground prong of the plug. 
     As also shown in  FIG.  121   , the wall plate  12106  comprises an inner wall portion  12182  that will extend around the front housing portion  12150  and the control module when the control module is attached to the power adapter and will be generally adjacent to the yoke  12140  when the wall plate is attached to the yoke, such as by way of screws that may extend through screw openings  12183 . The wall plate extends from side portions  12180  to the inner wall portion  12182  associated with the opening  12184 , where the inner wall portion is adjacent to the sides of the front housing portion  12150  and the standard outlet control module  12102 . According to some implementations, the front housing portion  12150  and the standard outlet control module  12102  may extend through the opening  12184 , such as by approximately 1.0 mm to 1.5 mm. While a wall plate having holes for receiving a screw is shown, it should be understood that a screwless wall plate could be implemented. The control module will also be able to be removed or inserted through and opening  12184  of the wall plate when the wall plate is attached to the yoke, as will be described in more detail below in reference to the operation of the latch  12115 . 
     The rear housing  12148  comprises vents  12158 , shown here by way of example on the side of the power adapter, which enable the transfer of air through the power adapter, including for example the release of air above an ambient temperature from the control module and the power adapter. Vents may also be included in other locations, such as vents  12160  shown on the top of the power adapter. As is shown in  FIG.  121   , a planar surface  12149  of the rear housing is below the vents  12160 . That is, the rear housing  12148  may be formed to provide enough room for the outlet behind the housing portion  12150 , while minimizing the amount of volume of the junction box that is occupied by the power adapter by forming the planar surface  12149  below the surface having the vents  12160 . 
     The outer surface of the power adapter may also comprise contact elements, such as a contact element  12162 , which may be threaded to receive a screw adapted to be coupled to a ground line in the junction box. The contact elements  12164  and  12166 , also shown here by way of example as receiving screw contacts, enable a connection to a line power wire of the junction box. As will be described in more detail below, the contact elements  12164  and  12166  also comprise threaded portions to receive a screw contact and are connected by a tab  12168 . The contact elements  12164  and  12166  can be separated (i.e., electrically isolated) by cutting the tab  12168  for separately wiring the outlet associated with the front housing portion  12150  to make that outlet a switched outlet which can be controlled by a switch on the wall for example. Another pair of contact elements for providing a neutral connection to the outlet is also provided (e.g., on the opposite side of the power adapter having contact elements  12164  and  12166  for example) as shown by connector  12510  in the expanded view of the power adapter  12104  of  FIG.  125   . While contact elements  12162 ,  12164 , and  12166  having screws are shown by way of example, it should be understood that the contact elements adapted to be coupled to the wires of the junction box may also comprise wires, such as wires extending from a printed circuit board (PCB) for example. 
     A recess  12170  is adapted to receive the standard outlet control module  12102 , where vents  12172  (which may be similar to and opposite to the vents  12158 ) can be seen from the inside of the recess. Because the recess  12170  is accessible to a user of the power adapter when the control module is removed from the power adapter, the vents  12158  and  12172  are designed to prevent any objects which may make contact with one or more live electrical parts (e.g., neutral and line voltages) in the junction box from being inserted through the vents. By way of example, the vents may be designed to prevent a probe from extending through the vent and into the junction box. The vents could be designed according to any standard of safety to prevent an object inserted in the recess  12170  from extending through the vents. For example, a probe could be approximately 2 inches long and have a diameter of approximately 0.031 inches with a 0.002 inch radius on the end of probe. The probe could be made of a metal material such as steel and could have an appropriate stiffness to prevent bending, such as a Rockwell hardness value between C58 to C60. 
     Referring to a power adapter having an outlet as shown in  FIG.  121   , the length of the prongs of a plug (i.e., how far the prongs extend past the front of the portion of the housing portion  12150  receiving the prongs of the plug) determine a minimum depth that the portion having the outlet would have to be to receive a plug, and where the planar surface  12149  in placed. That is, in order to receive the prongs of a plug in an outlet, the portion of the rear housing  12148  would have to extend at least a minimum distance from the front of the housing portion  12150 . In order for the control modules to be compatible with both power adapters having outlets and power adapters having switches, the electrical interface within the recess for receiving control modules of the power adapters having outlets and power adapters having switches are provided at the same location. Provided that there is enough volume to retain all of the elements of a power adapter having a switch (i.e., the elements for switching power to a load or sending a signal on a traveler line for example), the portion of power adapter having a switch can also have a reduced amount of material, as will be described in reference to  FIG.  131    for example. 
     In addition to a reduced volume of the power adapter, the volume of a control module, such as the standard outlet control module  12102  as shown, may be reduced by providing a depth D 2  of the control module extending to a minimum depth required to receive prongs of a plug. That is, while a portion of the control module extends to a depth D 1  to allow for the contact elements of the control module to make an electrical connection to corresponding contact elements of the power adapter, the overall volume of the control module can be reduced by reducing the depth of the control module behind the outlet of the control module. As will be described in more detail below in reference to  FIGS.  135  and  136   , the overall volume of the power adapter arrangement is reduced by providing the contacts at a depth D 1 , where the depth of the recess  12170  is greater than D 1 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  122   , an expanded view of the standard outlet control module  12102  having an outlet is shown. As can be seen in the expanded view of  FIG.  122    where the latch  12115  is separated from the front housing  12109 , an opening  12202  enables the attachment element  12126  to be received by a corresponding opening  12204  on a top planar surface  12206  of the front housing  12109 . The attachment element  12126  enables the latch  12115  to be movably attached to the front housing  12109 , where the latch  12115  is adapted to rotate along walls  12208  to enable the opening  12122  of the latch to align with the guide  12128  of standard outlet control module  12102 . 
     The various internal components and the inside of the rear housing  12111  of the control module are also shown in more detail in the expanded view of  FIG.  122   . A housing portion  12210  is adapted to receive contact elements of connectors that are adapted to receive the prongs of a plug. More particularly, the housing portion  12210  comprises an opening  12212  that extends to a cavity  12214  for receiving a contact element  12232  associated with the neutral voltage. An opening  12216  extends to a cavity  12218  for receiving a contact element  12239  associated with the line voltage. A contact element  12236  is positioned below the housing portion  12210  when the standard outlet control module  12102  is assembled. 
     A tamper resistance element  12220  is adapted to be placed over the openings  12212  and  12216  to prevent inadvertent contact with a line or neutral voltage coupled to the control module. The tamper resistance element  12220  comprises a ramp portion  12222  that is adapted to make contact with a prong of a plug as the plug is inserted into the opening  12110 , causing the tamper resistance element  12220  to be moved and the prongs of a plug to be inserted into the openings  12212  and  12216  of the housing portion  12210 . That is, when the tamper resistance element is moved, the ramp portion  12222  will be positioned to expose the opening  12212  to allow the neutral prong of a plug to make an electrical connection with a neutral contact element  12232  of a connector of the control module, and an opening  12224  will align with the opening  12216  to allow the power prong of the plug to be inserted into the opening  12216  and make an electrical connection with a power contact element  12239  of a connector of the control module. 
     The tamper resistance element  12220  may comprise a projection  12226  for receiving a spring element  12228 . The tamper resistance element  12220  may be held in place in a resting state and allowed to move by the spring element  12228 . While a coil spring is shown by way of example, any type of element that retains the tamper resistance element  12220  in a resting state and allows the tamper resistance element to be moved as the control module is plugged in to be used. While the tamper resistance element  12220  is shown by way of example as a single piece shutter element, it should be understood that other types of shutter arrangements could be employed. For example, any type of tamper resistance element could be employed where it is necessary for one element, such as a prong of a plug to be inserted, to be used to enable another element, such as another prong of a plug, to make an electrical connection with a contact element of the control module. 
     The connectors for providing an electrical connection between contact elements that are accessible on the front surface  12108  of the control module and corresponding contact elements of the power adapter  12104  are also shown. More particularly, a connector  12230  comprises a contact element  12232 , which is adapted to make electrical connection to a contact element of a plug, and the contact element  12130  for making an electrical connection to a corresponding contact element of the power adapter and to receive the neutral voltage when the standard outlet control module  12102  is inserted into a power adapter. Similarly, a connector  12234  comprises a contact element  12236 , which is adapted to make an electrical connection to a second contact element of a plug, and the contact element  12132  for making an electrical connection to a corresponding contact element of the power adapter and to receive a ground voltage when the standard outlet control module  12102  is inserted into a power adapter. A connector  12238  comprises a contact element  12239 , which is adapted to make electrical connection to a third contact element of a plug, and the contact element  12134  for making an electrical connection to a corresponding contact element of the power adapter and to receive a line voltage when the standard outlet control module  12102  is inserted into a power adapter. 
     The rear housing  12111  of the control module is formed to retain the connectors  12230 ,  12234 , and  12238 . More particularly, the rear housing  12111  comprises an opening  12240  receiving the contact element  12130 , an opening  12242  for receiving the contact element  12132 , and an opening  12244  for receiving the contact element  12134 . The rear housing  12111  also comprises support structures, shown here by way of example as ridges  12246  for receiving the connectors  12230 ,  12234 , and  12238  to aid in holding the connectors in place during and after assembly of the control module. The internal components and the formation of the inside of the housings are shown by way of example, and it should be understood that the components and the formation of the housings could be implemented differently. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  123   , a first expanded view shows the back of the standard outlet control module  12102 , where a latch  12115  of the module is separated from the housing module. As can be seen in  FIG.  123   , the latch is in a rotated position, where the opening  12122  is aligned with the guide  12128  (which extends through both the front housing  12109  and the rear housing  12111 ). When the latch  12115  is in this position, a corresponding latch element of the power adapter (shown for example as latch element  12561  of  FIG.  125    or latch element  12810  of  FIG.  128   ) is allowed to enter the guide  12128  and the opening  12122  and move through the guide  12124  as the latch is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in the figure as shown and the body of the control module is inserted into the recess of the power adapter. A projection  12302  on the latch is intended to engage a corresponding projection  12304  to prevent the latch  12115  from being rotated too far in the clockwise direction (as shown looking at the top of the standard outlet control module  12102 ), while a second projection  12306  of the front housing  12109  is intended to prevent the latch from being rotated too far in the counterclockwise direction. When the latch is rotated as far as possible in the clockwise direction (i.e., when the projection  12302  engages the projection  12304 , the guide  12128  will be able to receive a corresponding latch element of the power adapter (e.g., the latch element  12561  or the latch element  12810 ) to start the latching process. As the control module is moved into the recess of the power adapter, the latch element of the power adapter (e.g., latch element  12561  of  FIG.  125    or the latch element  12810  of  FIG.  128   ) will advance through the guide  12124 , where the latch element will be at the end  12127  of the guide  12124  when the planar surface  12116  is flush with the front surface  12108  and the control module will be retained within the recess of the power adapter. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  124   , a second expanded view shows additional details of the backs of components of the standard outlet control module  12102 . As is apparent in  FIG.  124   , the contact elements  12130 ,  12132 , and  12134 , extend through the openings  12240 ,  12242 , and  12244 , respectively. The front housing  12109  also comprises ridges  12402  to align with ridges  12246  and retain the connectors  12230 ,  12234  and  12238 . Support structures  12404  are provided in the front housing to provide support of the housing portion  12210 . A support structure  12406  may also be provided to provide additional support the actuator  12136  to enable the actuator  12136  move a tamper resistance element, such as tamper resistance element  12220 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  125   , an expanded view of the power adapter  12104  having an outlet shows various elements of the power adapter. More particularly, the expanded view of  FIG.  125    shows various elements of the rear housing  12148 , including openings  12502  and  12504  for receiving contact elements, such as contact elements having threaded portions for receiving screws. As will be described in more detail below, the openings  12502  and  12504  are adapted to receive the contact elements  12164  and  12166  that are electrically connected by the tab  12168 , and can be separated (i.e., electrically isolated) by severing the tab  12168  between the contact elements. Another opening  12506  is provided to receive another contact element, such as a ground contact element. Openings  12507  and  12508  are also provided in the rear housing  12148  and may be opposite the openings  12502  and  12504  to provide access to contact elements associated with the connector  12510 . 
     Connectors adapted to be inserted in the rear housing  12148  enable the connection between contact elements adapted to be electrically coupled to wires in the junction box and other contact elements of the power adapter. The contact elements of a power adapter having an outlet may be placed in certain locations for an efficient layout, where the neutral contact elements that are adapted to receive a neutral voltage of a wire of a junction box may be placed near the location of the neutral contact element of a conventional outlet, the line contact elements that are adapted to receive a line voltage from a wire of a junction box are placed near the location of the line contact element of a conventional outlet, and the ground contact element that is adapted to receive a ground voltage from a wire of a junction box is placed near the location of the ground contact element of a conventional outlet (i.e. the standard locations for line, neutral and ground contact elements of an outlet commonly used in North America as shown in  FIG.  121    for example). 
     The connector  12510 , which may be adapted to provide a neutral voltage from a wire of the junction box to the power adapter, may comprise two contact elements that can be adapted to receive screws, and that can be separated by severing a tab between the contact elements to enable separate wiring of the outlet of the power adapter and a control module, as will be described in more detail below. The connector  12510  comprises a contact element  12512  adapted to receive a prong of a plug and extends to the pair of contact elements  12516  and  12518 , each of which is adapted to receive a screw  12519 . The contact elements are electrically connected by a tab  12517  that can be separated to enable the outlet of the power adapter to be separately wired (i.e., such as a switched outlet controlled by a switch on the wall). The connector  12510  also comprises a contact element  12514  that is adapted to receive a corresponding contact element of a control module. 
     Another connector  12520  comprises the contact element  12162  which is threaded to receive a screw  12519 , and also a contact element  12524  which is adapted to receive a corresponding contact element of a control module. The contact element  12524  may be adapted to receive a ground contact element of the control module for example. The contact element may also be adapted to be electrically coupled to yoke  12140  to provide the ground voltage to the yoke. 
     A connector  12530  also comprises a pair of contact elements that can be adapted receive a screw and can be severed to enable separate wiring of the outlet and the control module. The connector  12530  may be adapted to receive a line voltage from a wire of the junction box. A tab  12168  is adapted to electrically couple a contact element  12164  and a contact element  12166 , each of which are adapted receive a screw  12519 . The tab  12168  can also be severed to provide electrical isolation between the contact elements and to enable independently wiring the outlet of the power adapter. The connector  12530  also comprises a contact element  12532  that is adapted to receive a prong of a plug, and a contact element  12538  that is adapted to receive a corresponding contact element of a control module. The connector  12530  may be coupled to receive a line voltage for example. 
     Various insulating elements are also provided to allow an electrical connection of contact elements comprising prongs of a plug to the outlet of the power adapter. More particularly, a tamper resistance element  12550  comprising an opening  12552  and the ramp  12554  is movable behind the openings of the outlet on the front housing portion  12150 . That is, the neutral prong of a plug will engage the ramp  12554  and move the tamper resistance element  12550  to allow the plug to be inserted into the outlet. According to one implementation, a projection  12556  may receive a spring  12558  to retain the tamper resistance element  12550  in place to cover the openings to the contact elements (i.e., openings  12563  and  12564 ) when the plug is not inserted into the outlet. An opening  12565  is also provided to receive the contact element  12524  associated with connector  12520  receiving a ground voltage. 
     The power adapter  12104  also comprises a housing portion  12560  for receiving the contact element  12512  of the connector  12510 , contact element  12524  of the connector  12520 , and the contact element  12538  of the connector  12530 . The housing portion  12560  comprises a latch element  12561  on a horizontal surface  12562 , where the latch element  12561  is adapted to be received in the guide  12124  of the latch  12115 . The latch element  12561  may comprise a projection, such as a cylindrical projection, and may be a part of the housing portion  12560  (i.e., formed on the housing portion during the formation of the housing portion) or attached to the housing portion  12560 . A vertical surface  12559  below the front housing portion  12150  comprises an opening  12563  for receiving a neutral prong of a plug and an opening  12564  receiving a line prong of a plug. Another vertical projection  12566  extending from the bottom of the horizontal surface  12562  comprises a first set of openings  12567  for receiving actuator elements of a control module, and a second set of openings  12568  for receiving contact elements of the control module. 
     The electrical interface (i.e., the contact elements accessible through the second set of opening  12568 ) for receiving contact elements of the control module is also tamper resistant. An opening  12569  is provided to receive an actuator element (e.g., actuator  12136  that engages actuator  12575  of tamper resistance element  12570 ) for moving the tamper resistance element  12570  so that the contact elements of the power adapter that are adapted to receive the corresponding contact elements of the control module. The tamper resistance element  12570  comprises a set of openings  12572  for receiving the actuators of a control module, and a set of openings  12574  for receiving contact elements of the control module, where the contact elements of the control module are adapted to be electrically coupled to corresponding contact elements of the power adapter. The tamper resistance element  12570  also comprises a recess  12576  for receiving a spring, which may be similar to spring  12558  for example. The tamper resistance element  12570  may be movable to enable electrical connections between contact elements of a control module and contact elements of the power adapter when the control module is inserted into the recess. That is, the spring element retains the tamper resistance element  12570  in a resting position to cover contact elements in the recess of the power adapter when the control module is removed. The openings of the sets of openings  12567  and  12568  will be described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  129   . 
     Additional details related to the yoke  12140  are also as shown in  FIG.  125   . More particularly, a projection  12580  enables a grounding of the yoke  12140 . By way of example, the projection  12580  may be coupled to a connector of the power adapter that receives the ground voltage, such as the connector  12520 . The projection  12580  is electrically coupled to a projection  12581 , which may be perpendicular to projection  12580  and which extends into a recess  12582  of the yoke. The projection  12580  comprises an opening  12584  adapted to receive a ground prong of a plug. A contact element  12586  may be riveted to the projection  12580 , where the contact element  12586  provides an improved electrical connection to the ground prong of the plug. The contact element  12586  may comprise a brass element that is riveted to the projection  12580 . That is, the yoke may be made of steel and an additional brass contact element  12586  may be secured to the yoke to provide an improved electrical connection. 
     As with any product where it is beneficial to reduce the volume of a material in the product, it is beneficial to reduce the amount of metal associated with connectors in a power adapter or a control module for a variety of reasons, including at least the ability to provide simple bent metal parts that function as connectors (e.g., easier to form, fewer bends, and less metal). The arrangement of elements of the power adapter having an outlet and a control module provide significant benefits in reducing the amount of material required and the volume of a junction box occupied by the power adapter. 
     Considering the power adapter  12104  having an outlet, the location and order of the connectors reduces the amount of material in the power adapter, including reducing the lengths of connectors of both power adapters and control modules. For example, for a power adapter having an outlet, it is beneficial to place the neutral contact element on the side of the power adapter having the contact element of the outlet for receiving a neutral contact element of a plug, and the line contact element on the side of the power adapter having the contact element of the outlet for receiving a line contact element of a plug. 
     The location of the contact elements of the connectors outside of the power adapter and within the power adapter may also reduce the amount of metal required for the power adapter and a control module. For example, the locations of contact elements of bent metal connectors having contact elements that comprise screw terminals exposed on one or more outer surfaces of the power adapter, can influence the amount of metal and the complexity of the connector (i.e., the number of bends required in the connector). Further, the location and order of the connectors of a control module having an outlet, such as standard outlet control module  12102  also reduces the amount of material in the control module. The various connections and contact elements of  FIGS.  124  and  125    may be formed metal parts that may be stamped, laser etched, pressed or formed in some other suitable way from a conductive material, including an appropriate metal material such as copper, aluminum, or so other that meets the necessary specifications for a particular application. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  126   , an expanded view  12600  shows a power adapter arrangement having a switch and a cover portion, and a wall plate for the power adapter arrangement. More particularly, a power adapter  12602  is adapted to receive a control module or a cover, shown here by way of example as a cover  12604 . The cover has the function of covering the recess, which may help protect the contact elements of the electrical interface in the recess of the power adapter but does not route electrical signals. The power adapter  12602  comprises a rear housing  12606  having openings for receiving contact elements that are adapted to be coupled to wires of a junction box, as described above in reference to the power adapter  12104  having an outlet of  FIG.  121   . A contact element  12608  associated with a first connector may comprise a threaded portion for receiving a screw as shown and may be adapted to receive a line voltage from a wire in the junction box for example. A second contact element  12610  may be adapted to receive a ground voltage from a wire of the junction box for example. As will be described in more detail below, the ground voltage may be coupled to a yoke of the power adapter  12602 . While the contact elements are shown by way of example as having threaded portions for receiving screws, the contact elements  12608  and  12610  could be wires or some other form of electrical connector, such as a contact element that is adapted to receive a free end of a wire and retains the free end of the wire by a friction fit. 
     A recess  12612  is adapted to receive the cover  12604 , or a control module. The vents  12614  on the inside of the recess are similar to the corresponding vents  12616  shown on the outside of the housing. The vents  12614  and  12616  may be designed to prevent an object from being placed into the recess and through an opening in a vent, thus avoiding any contact with a high voltage power line within the junction box. 
     The yoke  12622  for the power adapter  12602  is similar to the yoke for the power adapter  12104  of  FIG.  121   . The yoke  12622  also comprises flange portions  12624  having openings  12626  for receiving a screw to secure the power adapter to a junction box, and threaded portions  12628  receiving screws to secure a wall plate to the junction box. 
     A switch actuator  12630  is shown. According to one implementation, the switch actuator  12630  comprises a first end  12632  that can be depressed for changing the state of the switch, and a second end  12634  that can also be depressed for changing the state of the switch. For example, the switch actuator  12630  is movable to turn on or off a light or other load controlled by the switch. While the switch actuator  12630  is shown by way of example as a switch actuator that returns to a resting position in the center as shown, it should be understood that the switch actuator could be implemented as being retained in a resting state on one side or the other. That is, the switch actuator may be retained in a first state when the first end  12632  is pressed, such as to turn off the light controlled by the switch, or in a second state when the second end  12634  Is pressed, such as to turn on the light. The switch actuator  12630  is retained in a recess of a housing portion  12635 , as will be described in more detail below. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  127   , a rear view of the cover of  FIG.  126    is shown. As can be seen in  FIG.  127   , the inside of the cover is hollow to reduce the amount of material used to form the cover, while providing sufficient surface area to implement the latch and maintain the proper positioning of the cover within the recess. More particularly, a recess  12702  is provided to minimize the amount of material in the cover. The cover also comprises projections, such as projection  12704 , for limiting the amount that the latch  12115  can rotate, as described above in reference to the projections  12304  and  12306 . It should be noted that all elements of the cover could be made of recyclable materials. As a result, unlike with the installation of conventional switches and outlets, all of the components are recyclable when a switch is upgraded to replace the cover with a control module that has a certain functionality. Similarly, many outlet modules that operate as passive outlet modules may comprise components, such as plastic and metal components, that can be easily recycled. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  128   , a front perspective view of the power adapter  12602  having a switch of  FIG.  126    is shown. As can be seen in the front perspective view of  FIG.  128   , a housing portion  12802  comprises a first set of openings  12804  adapted to receive one or more actuators of a control module, and a second set of openings  12806  adapted to receive contact elements of a control module. The housing portion  12802  also comprises an opening  12808  that is adapted to receive an actuator for moving a tamper resistance element, as will be described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  129   . A latch element  12810  on an interior wall  12812  of the recess  12612 , shown here by way of example as being on the wall of a housing portion perpendicular to the housing portion  12802 , is provided to enable latching the cover (or a control module) to the power adapter to cover the recess in the power adapter. The latch  12115  of the cover, when rotated as described above, will secure the cover to the power adapter when the latch element  12810  is advanced through the guide  12124  of the latch  12115 , as described above. 
     Various elements of the power adapters and the control modules, as well as the relationship between the power adapters and the control modules, reduce the volume of materials in both the power adapters and control modules. For example, by placing the electrical interface comprising connectors in the recess of the control module and the connector interface of power adapter toward the middle of the power adapter (as shown for example in  FIG.  128   ) rather than further back in the recess, such as on a rear surface of the recess of the power adapter, less material is required for both the power adapter and the control module. Further, the power adapter (and the power adapter arrangement comprising a power adapter and a control module or cover) occupies less volume of the junction box. 
     As shown for example in  FIG.  128   , by providing an electrical interface having connectors of the power adapter that is above the rear surface of the recess as shown (i.e., not as deep into the recess as other elements of a control module of  FIG.  135    may extend when the control module is inserted into the recess), the connectors of the power adapter that receive corresponding connectors of the control module do not need to protrude from the back of the power adapter, which would decrease the available volume of a given junction box that receives the power adapter. That is, positioning the electrical interface as shown in  FIG.  128    creates a two-level recess that reduces the material required by the power adapter arrangement and the volume of the junction box occupied by the power adapter arrangement. The two-level recess may also reduce the length of contact elements of both the power adapter and a control module, as will be described in more detail below. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  129   , an expanded view of the power adapter  12602  is shown. Openings for receiving the contact elements adapted to be coupled to a wire of the junction box can be seen. An opening  12902  above the vents  12616  is adapted to receive a contact element associated with a first connector and opening  12904  on the top of the rear housing of the power adapter is adapted to receive a contact element associated with a second connector, and an opening  12906  on the side opposite the opening  12902  is adapted to receive a contact element associated with a third connector. An opening adapted to receive a fourth contact element may be provided on the end of the power adapter having the opening  12904 , as will be described in more detail below in reference to  FIG.  130   . 
     A contact arrangement  12910  comprises a plurality of connectors that are configured to make electrical connections between contact elements that are exposed on an outer surface of the power adapter (i.e., contact elements accessible through openings  12902 ,  12904  and  12906 ) and contact elements that are accessible through the housing portion  12802 . Some of the connectors make electrical connection between certain other connectors, where those connections may be broken by an actuator of a control module, as will be described in more detail below. 
     A tamper resistance element  12912  comprises openings for receiving actuator elements or contact elements is also shown. The tamper resistance element may be an insulating element having openings that align with openings of the housing portion  12635 . A first set of openings tamper resistance element  12912  comprises a first opening  12914 , a second opening  12916 , a third opening  12918 , a fourth opening  12920 , a fifth opening  12922 , and a sixth opening  12924 . The tamper resistance element  12912  also comprises openings for receiving actuator elements for breaking connections between contact elements of the contact arrangement  12910 , including a first opening  12926 , a second opening  12928 , and a third opening  12930 . The tamper resistance element  12912  also comprises a cavity  12932  for receiving a spring element  12934  that retains or returns the tamper resistance element to a resting state after a control module is removed from the recess  12612 . The tamper resistance element also comprises an actuator  12935  that is provided to engage a corresponding actuator of the control module. That is, when the control module is inserted into the recess  12612 , the actuator of the control module (e.g., actuator  12136  of a control module) will engage the actuator  12575  or  12935  for example to move the tamper resistance element and to enable the contact elements of the control module to engage with corresponding contact elements accessible on the housing portion  12802  (or enable actuators to break electrical contacts of the contact arrangement  12910 ). 
     The housing portion  12635  also comprises a first set of openings for receiving contact elements of the control module, including a first opening  12936 , a second opening  12938 , a third opening  12940 , a fourth opening  12942 , a fifth opening  12944 , and a sixth opening  12946 , and a second set of openings for receiving actuators of the control module, including a first opening  12948 , a second opening  12950 , and a third opening  12952 . The housing portion  12635  also comprises an opening  12954  for receiving an actuator of the control module to engage the actuator  12935  and move the tamper resistance element  12912  so that the openings of the housing portion and the tamper resistance element align (i.e. the six openings of the set of openings of the housing portion  12635  align with the six openings of the first set of openings of the tamper resistance element  12912 , and the three openings of the second set of openings of the housing portion align with the three openings of the second set of openings of the tamper resistance element). 
     The openings of the housing portion and the openings of the tamper resistance element are not aligned unless the tamper resistance element is moved by an actuator element of the control module to enable the contact elements to make an electrical connection to corresponding contact elements of the power adapter. That is, in a resting state, the tamper resistance element is intended to block the openings of the housing portion  12635  to prevent any inadvertent contact with a contact element of the electrical interface in the recess. 
     The housing portion  12635  also comprises an opening  12956  for receiving an actuator element  12958  (shown in dashed lines and behind the front surface of the switch actuator  12630 ). When the switch actuator  12630  is moved from one state to another, the actuator element  12958  is moved to engage a switch associated with the contact arrangement  12910 , as will be described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  130   . An attachment element  12959  is provided to engage a corresponding attachment element of the housing portion  12635 , as will be described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  131   . 
     The yoke  12622  of the power adapter  12602  comprises a projection  12960  that extends to a threaded portion  12962 , which is adapted to receive a screw for receiving a reference voltage, such as a ground voltage for example. According to one implementation, the yoke is adapted to be coupled to a connector of the contact arrangement  12910  that receives the ground voltage to also ground the yoke. The yoke  12622  also comprises recesses  12964  in a portion extending down from the yoke. The recesses  12964  are adapted to engage the projections  12966  and secure the yoke to the rear housing. 
     Assuming that all of the switch elements of a power adapter having a switch can occupy the area defined by an outlet of a power adapter having an outlet, as described for example in reference to  FIGS.  121 - 125   , the volume of a power adapter having a switch can be approximately the same as the volume of a power adapter having an outlet, where the differences in volume may relate to different numbers of contact elements required for a power adapter having a switch compared to a power adapter having an outlet. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  130   , an expanded view of the contact arrangement  12910  of  FIG.  129    is shown. The contact arrangement  12910  comprises a plurality of connectors that extend between contact elements. In some cases, the connector may extend between in contact element that is adapted to make an electrical connection to a wire of the junction box on one end and a contact element that receives a corresponding contact element of a control module on the other end. In other cases, the connector may be internal to the power adapter, and provide an electrical connection between other connectors (where the electrical connection may be broken by an actuator of the control module as will be described in more detail below). 
     The contact arrangement  12910  of  FIG.  129    could be implemented to provide the electrical connections of a single pole switch of the power adapter  11202  of  FIG.  112   , for example. Each of the four contact elements having a threaded portion to receive a screw on an external surface of the power adapter is configured to be coupled to one of the line, ground, neutral or load lines of the junction box. More particularly, a connector  13002  extends from a contact element  13004  to a contact element  13006  that is adapted to receive a corresponding contact element of a control module. The contact element  13004  is adapted to receive a screw  13008  at a threaded portion  13010 . The connector  13002  may be used to receive a neutral voltage by way of a wire of the junction box, for example. 
     A connector  13012  extends from a contact element  13014  to a contact element  13016  that is adapted to receive a corresponding contact element of a control module. The contact element  13014  comprises a threaded portion and is adapted to receive a screw  13008  for securing a wire of the junction box to the contact element. The connector  13012  may be used to receive a ground (GND) voltage by way of a wire of the junction box, for example. 
     A connector  13022  extends from a contact element  13024  to a contact element  13026  that is adapted to receive a corresponding contact element of a control module. The contact element  13024  is adapted to receive a screw  13008  at a threaded portion  13010 . The connector  13022  may be coupled to the load by way of a wire of the junction box, for example. 
     A connector  13032  extends from a contact element  13034  to a contact element  13036  that is adapted to receive a corresponding contact element of a control module. The connector  13032  may be used to electrically connect the connector  13022  associated with the load and may operate as a part of the switch of the single pole switch, for example. 
     A connector  13042  extends from a contact element  13044  to a contact element  13046  that is adapted to receive a corresponding contact element of a control module. The connector  13042  may be used to receive a signal on a traveler contact element of the single pole switch and may operate as a part of the switch of the single pole switch, for example. 
     A connector  13052  extends from a contact element  13054  and extends to a contact element  13058  that is adapted to receive a corresponding contact element of a control module. The contact element  13054  is adapted to receive a screw  13008  at a threaded portion  13010 . The connector  13052  may be used to receive a line voltage, for example a 120V AC signal, by way of a wire of the junction box. 
     A connector  13062  extends from a contact element  13064  and extends to a contact element  13066 . The connector  13062  may be used to break a connection between a load contact element and a switch contact element, for example. 
     A connector  13072  extends from a contact element  13074  and extends to a contact element  13076  that is adapted to function as part of a switch. The connector  13072  may operate as a switch element between the switch contact element and a traveler contact element, for example. 
     The connector  13082  extends from a contact element  13084  to a contact element  13086 . The connector may be used to enable a break in a connection between the connector  13042  associated with the traveler contact element and the connector  13052  associated with the line voltage. 
     The connectors may be formed of metal elements, such as steel or aluminum as is known in the art. It should be understood that the contact arrangement  12910  provides one example of a contact arrangement that could be used to enable the appropriate electrical connections for the control module, but other suitable contact arrangements could be employed. For example, the contact elements that are adapted to be connected to a wire could be implemented as screw terminal components or wires soldered to a printed circuit board (PCB), the contact elements adapted to receive corresponding contact elements of a control module may be implemented as contact elements soldered to a printed circuit board, and connections between the various contact elements could be electrically coupled by traces on a printed circuit board. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  131   , an expanded view of another power adapter arrangement  13100  comprising a power adapter having a switch and a cover is shown. The power adapter arrangement may be adapted to be implemented as a primary power adapter that performs switching of power to a load in a 3-way connection and may provide the functionality of the power adapter  11501  of  FIG.  115    for example. The rear housing  13102  of the power adapter may comprise vents  13104 , shown here by way of example at the top of the housing. The vents  13104  could be implemented in a different location, or additional venting could be implemented as shown in the power adapter  12602 . The rear housing  13102  may comprise a top portion  13106  that is shaped to accommodate the elements of a switching circuit  13112 , including a switching element  13114 , which may be a relay or a TRIAC for example, and other components on a PCB  13116 . The PCB may also be electrically coupled to wires  13118  for connecting circuits of the printed circuit board to wires of the junction box. According to one implementation, the wires  13118  may comprise a first wire  13120 , a second wire  13122 , a third wire  13124 , a fourth wire  13126 , and a fifth wire  13128 . The wires  13118  may be implemented to provide electrical connections to a line voltage, a ground voltage, a neutral voltage, a load controlled by the power adapter, and a traveler line, as shown for the power adapter  11501  in  FIG.  115    for example. A connector arrangement  13130  may be implemented, as for example in  FIGS.  131  and  132   . The power adapter also comprises a yoke  13108  and may receive a cover  13110 . The remaining portions of the power adapter of  FIG.  131   , such as the switch  12630 , the housing portion  12635  and the tamper resistance element  12912 , may be similar to the power adapter  12602 . 
     Turning now to  FIGS.  132  and  133   , perspective views of the connector arrangement  13130  of the power adapter of  FIG.  131    are shown.  FIG.  132    shows the contact arrangement as implemented when soldered to a PCB for example, while  FIG.  133    shows the connectors being separated to describe the various contact elements of the connectors. It should be noted that some connectors of the connector arrangement  13130  comprise contact elements that are adapted to receive a contact element of a control module. Other connectors may be soldered to a PCB and make an electrical connection between circuit elements on the PCB and are adapted to receive actuators of a control module that break connections between circuit elements on the PCB. Other connectors comprise contact elements that are used to electrically couple two connectors, where an electrical connection provided by these connectors may be broken (i.e., electrically disconnected) by an actuator of a control module. 
     More particularly, a first connector  13202  comprises a contact element  13204  that is adapted to be soldered to a printed circuit board and a contact element  13206  that is adapted to receive a corresponding contact element of a control module. According to one implementation, the connector  13202  may be used to receive a neutral voltage. 
     A second connector  13212  comprises a contact element  13214  that is adapted to be soldered to a printed circuit board and a contact element  13216  that is adapted to receive a corresponding contact element of a control module. According to one implementation, the connector  13212  may be used to receive a ground voltage. 
     A third connector  13222  comprises a contact element  13224  that is adapted to be soldered to a printed circuit board and a contact element  13226  that is adapted to receive a corresponding contact element of a control module. According to one implementation, the connector  13222  may be used to provide an electrical connection to a load contact element. 
     A fourth connector  13232  comprises a contact element  13234  that is adapted to be soldered to a printed circuit board and a contact element  13236  that is adapted to receive a corresponding contact element of a control module. According to one implementation, the connector  13232  may be used to provide an electrical connection to a contact element associated with a switch. 
     A fifth connector  13242  comprises a contact element  13244  that is adapted to be soldered to a printed circuit board and a contact element  13246  that is adapted to receive a corresponding contact element of a control module. According to one implementation, the connector  13242  may be used to provide an electrical connection to a contact element associated with a traveler line. 
     A sixth connector  13252  comprises a contact element  13254  that is adapted to be soldered to a printed circuit board and a contact element  13256  that is adapted to receive a corresponding contact element of a control module. According to one implementation, the connector  13252  may be used to provide an electrical connection to a line voltage. 
     A seventh connector  13262  comprises contact elements  13264  that are adapted to be soldered to a printed circuit board and a contact element  13266  that is adapted to make an electrical connection to another connector of the power adapter. According to one implementation, the connector  13262  may be used to provide an electrical connection between the load and the switch. 
     An eighth connector  13272  and a ninth connector  13282  are adapted to enable an actuator of a control module to break a connection between a switch contact element and a load contact element, as shown for example in the power adapter  11501  of  FIG.  115    for example. The eighth connector  13272  comprises a contact element  13274  that is adapted to be soldered to a printed circuit board and a contact element  13276 . The ninth connector  13282  comprises a contact element  13284  that is adapted to be soldered to a printed circuit board and a contact element  13286 . The contact elements  13276  and  13286  are adapted to receive an actuator of a control module to break an electrical connection, such as a connection between an output of a switch to a load as shown in the power adapter  11501  of  FIG.  115   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  134   , an expanded view shows another power adapter arrangement having a cover. The power adapter arrangement comprises a power adapter having a rear housing  13402  that is adapted to receive a switching circuit  13404  that sends a switching signal and has components for enabling a remote switching operation in a 3-way wiring circuit, such as described in reference to power adapter  11001  of  FIG.  115    for example. The switching circuit  13404  may comprise a set of contact elements  13406  coupled to a printed circuit board  13408  having components for enabling the generation and transmission of switching signals, shown by way of example as component  13410 . The printed circuit board may also be adapted receive wires  13412 . 
     According to one implementation the wires  13412  may comprise four wires, including a first wire  13414 , a second wire  13416 , a third wire  13418 , and a fourth wire  13420 . The wires  13412  may be configured to receive a line voltage, a ground voltage, a neutral voltage, and a wire for transmitting signals over a traveler line, as described above in reference to the power adapter  10704  of  FIG.  115    for example. It should be noted that the power adapter of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  134    is shown having contact elements that are stand-alone contact elements associated with a printed circuit board having wires but could be implemented with contact elements providing electrical connections on an external surface of the power adapter having screw terminals in place of the wires. 
     The remaining elements of the power adapter of  FIG.  134    may be implemented in a similar manner as the power adapter  12602 . That is, the power adapter will also include a yoke  12622 , a switch actuator  12630  having an attachment element  13424  adapted to be attached to a corresponding attachment element of the housing portion  12635 , a housing portion  12635  and a tamper resistance element  12912 . The power adapter  13400  having a switch may be implemented as a remote switch in a 3-way switching configuration as set forth in  FIG.  115    and may receive a cover  13426  having a flange  13428  adapted to be moved by an actuator  13430  or a control module as described above. 
     Turning now to  FIGS.  135  and  136   , a perspective view of the fronts of 3 different types of control modules having different contact arrangements are shown in  FIG.  135    and the rear sides of the 3 different types of control modules are shown in  FIG.  136   . The figures are provided to show examples of different arrangements of contact elements and actuators that enable different control modules to be implemented in different power adapters as described above. Depending upon the functionality of the control module, different contact elements may be provided for making an electrical connection to a corresponding contact element of a power adapter. Similarly, depending upon the functionality of a control module, different actuators may be used to break an electrical connection between contact elements of a power adapter. While three examples are shown, it should be understood that additional arrangements of contact elements and actuators could be implemented according to various implementations of the power adapters. As is apparent from the description of the three control modules, the three arrangements of contact elements and actuators are provided not only to show how the three arrangements may be used in a given power adapter, but how a given control module may be used in different power adapters. 
     A first control module  13502  is a control module having electrical connections on a front surface  13503 , shown here by way of example with an outlet, such as an outlet for receiving a standard plug for 120 Volt AC signal as commonly used in North America for example, and two USB connectors, such as a USB-A connector and a USB-C connector as shown. According to the implementation of the control module  13502 , a first contact element  13504 , a second contact element  13506 , and a third contact element  13508  are provided. The contact elements of the control module  13502  may be configured to receive a power signal, a ground voltage, and a neutral voltage. Because the control module does not perform any switching when used with a power adapter that enables switching of power to a load, but rather acts as a passive control module for providing power to an outlet of a control module or a circuit of the control module (e.g., the USB connectors), only three contact elements are needed. While actuator  13510  is provided to move a tamper resistance element, for example by engaging an actuator  12575  of a tamper resistance element  12570  or an actuator  12935  of a tamper resistance element  12912  to enable the control module to be electrically coupled to the electrical interface of a power adapter, it should be understood that a contact element of the control module could also be used to engage a tamper resistance element and enable the contact elements of the control module to be coupled to corresponding contact elements of the power adapter. For example, one of the contact elements could be used not only make an electrical connection with a corresponding contact element of the power adapter but provide the function of the actuator  12136  for example to make contact to a ramp and move a tamper resistance element. It should be understood that the control module  13502  could be used in any power adapter having an outlet or any power adapter having a switch. 
     Other power adapters act as switching control modules that enable the switching of power to a load in a switch. For example, a second control module  13512  comprises a simple dimmer. The control module  13512  comprises a different arrangement of contact elements and includes an actuator for breaking an electrical connection between contact elements of the power adapter. More particularly, the control module  13512  comprises a first contact element  13514 , a second contact element  13516 , a third contact element  13518 , a fourth contact element  13520 , and a fifth contact element  13522 , and an actuator  13524  for breaking an electrical connection between contact elements of a power adapter. A sixth contact element  13602  can also be seen in  FIG.  136   . An actuator  13517  is provided to engage a tamper resistance element of a power adapter, where the actuator  13517  causes a tamper resistance element, such as tamper resistance element  12912 , to move and expose contact elements when the control module is inserted into a power adapter. The control module  13512  also comprises a dimmer control element  13526 . It should be understood that the control module  13512  could be used in any one of the power adapters having a switch. 
     Similarly, a third control module  13532  is adapted to provide electronic control of switching and may include a motion sensor or dimmer control for example, where the dimmer functionality is digitally controlled. The control module  13532  comprises a first contact element  13534 , a second contact element  13536 , a third contact element  13538 . Three additional contact elements can be seen in the rear view of control module  13532  of  FIG.  136   , including a contact element  13604 , a contact element  13606 , and a contact element  13608 . The control module  13532  also comprises three actuators, including a first actuator  13540 , a second actuator  13542 , and a third actuator  13544 , for breaking electrical connections within the power adapter. The control module  13532  also comprises an interface  13546  associated with an electronic control of the load and may be a dimmer control actuator or may be a motion sensor for example. 
     While there are different ways of forming connectors in electronic devices, the bent metal connectors for power adapters provide a number of benefits, including benefits for a power adapter having an outlet and a power adapter having a switch, and particularly the single pole switch as described above in reference to  FIGS.  126 - 130   . Considering first a power adapter having an outlet as described above for example in  FIGS.  121 - 125   , the connectors of the power adapter comprise contact elements facilitating three electrical connections, and therefore eliminate the need for a printed circuit board. For example, each of the connectors  12510 ,  12520  and  12530  comprise a contact element having a threaded portion for receiving screw to retain a wire in the junction box, a contact element for receiving a prong of a plug, and a contact element for receiving a corresponding contact element of a control module. Such an arrangement provides a simplified design that eliminates materials required in the power adapter, including eliminating at least a printed circuit board and any elements that may be required on the printed circuit board. 
     Similarly, for a single pole switch shown for example in  FIG.  129   , the use of bent metal connectors of the contact arrangement  12910  also eliminates the need for a PCB, solder or other material that may not be able to be easily recycled and may end up in a landfill and possibly introduce contaminants into the ground. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  137   , a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement  13700  having a thermal connection between the power adapter and the control module. More particularly, a control module  13702  comprises a front housing  13703  and a rear housing  13704 . Attached to or extending from the rear housing is a thermal conductive element  13706  that is used to dissipate heat from the control module  13702 . As will be described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  138   , the thermal conductive element  13706  may be attached to or part of a heat sink. The thermal conductive element  13706  could be any type of conductive element that would allow heat to be transferred from the control module, such as to a corresponding conductive element of the power adapter. 
     As shown in  FIG.  137   , the power adapter  13708  comprises contact elements  13523  and a yoke  13710  having a side yoke portion  13712  that extends into a recess  13716  for receiving the control module  13702  and a rear yoke portion  13714  along a rear surface of the recess. When the control module  13702  is inserted into the recess, the thermal conductive element  13706  makes a physical connection with the rear yoke portion  13714 , which extends from the side yoke portion  13712  in the recess  13716 , allowing heat to be dissipated by the body  13715  of the yoke  13710 . More particularly, the recess  13716  comprises a side portion  13718  and a rear portion  13720 . The side yoke portion  13712  can be integrated into the side portion  13718  (i.e., embedded with side portion to create a flush surface within the recess) or can be on top of the side portion, and the rear yoke portion  13714  can be integrated into the rear portion  13720  (i.e., embedded with side portion to create a flush surface within the recess) or can be on top of the rear portion. As can be seen in  FIG.  137   , because the yoke provides surface area outside of the control module and is exposed to the air, and some portions of the yoke may be in locations where any heat that dissipates off the yoke can escape from the junction box, the arrangement of the control module and the yoke having corresponding thermal conductive elements provides greater heat dissipation for a control module, such as a control module providing dimming functionality that may generate heat that may need to be dissipated. 
     While one example of a power adapter and a control module having corresponding thermal conductive elements to enable heat dissipation is shown in  FIG.  137   , it should be understood that other arrangements for providing a thermal interface between the control module and the power adapter could be implemented. For example, the entire rear housing  13704  could comprise a conductive element for enabling thermal conduction to a portion of the yoke. Similarly, a portion of the housing of the power adapter could comprise a conductive material to enable thermal conduction. The thermal conductive elements could comprise any thermally conductive material, such as a metal material, or thermally conductive pads that may be attached a thermal conductive material. According to some implementations, a thermal pad having an adhesive could be coupled to a thermal conductive material of one or both of the power adapter and the control module. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  138   , an expanded view  13800  of the control module  13702  as seen from the rear of the control module is shown. When the rear housing  13704  is removed, openings  13802  for receiving the contact elements  12523  are visible. Also shown are elements associated with controlling power in the control module. According to some implementations, the control module may comprise a TRIAC and associated elements for enabling heatsinking. The control module may comprise a heat sink  13804 , shown here by way of example as a heat sink having fins  13806 . A TRIAC  13807  may comprise a heat sinking portion  13808  for enabling the TRIAC to be attached to the heat sink and conduct heat from the heat sinking portion  13808  to the heat sink  13804 , and a semiconductor material  13810  which enables the switching operation of the TRIAC and generates the heat to be conducted away from the control module. A printed circuit board  13812  comprises circuit elements for controlling the switching of the TRIAC to control power applied to a load in response to external inputs to the control module, such as actuators on a front surface of the control module that is accessible to a user or a wireless input received by a wireless control circuit of the control module. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  139   , an expanded view of another control module  13900  from the front is shown. The control module of  FIG.  139    also comprises a dimmer circuit and is similar to the control module  13702 . However, the control module of  FIG.  139    comprises a different arrangement of elements, including contact elements for example. While the arrangement of contact elements of the control module  13702  could also be implemented in  FIG.  139   , the contact elements of  FIG.  139    provide another example of how to implement contact elements of a control module that make an electrical connection to corresponding contact elements of a power adapter. 
     The control module of  FIG.  139    comprises a front housing  13902  and a rear housing  13904 . The front housing comprises a slot  13906  in a recessed area  13908  for receiving a dimmer actuator  13910 . The dimmer actuator  13910  is adapted to be attached to a movable dimming element  13912  of a dimmer circuit  13914 . The rear housing  13904  comprises openings  13916  adapted to receive contact elements  13918 , shown here by way of example as horizontal contact elements. The contact elements  13918  may be attached to circuit elements of the control module, such as a printed circuit board  13920 . The PCB  13920  may be connected to one or more other PCBs in the control module, such as PCB  13922  and  13924 . 
     The control module also comprises other elements associated with a dimmer circuit for controlling the application of power to a load. For example, the control module comprises a heat sink  13926  having fins  13927 . The heat sink  13926  is coupled to a TRIAC  13928  having a heat sinking portion  13929  and a semiconductor portion  13930  for enabling operation of the TRIAC. Another PCB  13932  may be coupled to the other PCBs and include circuitry for enabling the operation of the dimmer. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  140   , a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement  14000  having a control module that allows venting of heat to the front face of the control module is shown. Because the power adapter arrangement is installed in a junction box and portions of the power adapter arrangement are covered with a wall plate, it may be challenging to dissipate heat when a significant portion of the heat would enter the junction box. According to the implementation of the control module  14002 , heat can be released through the front of the control module by way of a recess adjacent to the wall plate when the control module is inserted into the power adapter and the wall plate is attached. More particularly, the control module  14002  comprises a heat sink  14004  which is adjacent to a wall  14006  of front housing. The side of the heat sink  14004  is visible through the front and rear housings of the control module and the wall  14006  and defines a recess  14008  to allow heat from the heat sink to radiate out of the front of the control module. That is, the recess  14008  will not be blocked by the wall plate when the wall plate is placed over the yoke, allowing heat to escape out the front of the control module. An angled portion  14007  of the front housing allows heat that may be accumulating in the recess adjacent to the wall  14006  and the side of the heat sink  14004  to be released from the recess because the heat will rise. That is, heat in the recess will rise along the angled portion  14007  and released out of the front of the control module. The control module may also comprise indicator lights  14010 , which may be used to indicate a dimming value of the dimmer, and a switch actuator  14011  comprising an on actuator  14012  and an off actuator  14014  for turning power to a load on and off. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  141   , an expanded view of the control module  14002  is shown. The relationship of the heat sink  14004  and the wall  14006  is apparent, where heat dissipating from the heat sink  14004  will extend into the recess  14008  associated with a housing portion  14009 . The heat in the recess  14008  may be released out the front of the control module. That is, the recess  14008  between the wall  14006  and the side of the heat sink  14004  receives heat dissipating from the heat sink, which may be released out the front surface. According to some implementations, the rear housing may comprise vents  12616  that also allow heat to be released into the junction box. Also visible in the expanded view are attachment elements  14102  for receiving corresponding attachment elements  14103  of a switch actuator  14011 . Contact elements  14104  and  14106 , which may be attached to printed circuit boards of the control module, are adapted to extend through openings  14108  of the rear housing  14003 . 
     When using power adapters having an outlet, it is necessary to know the rating of the outlet, and particularly how much current in Amperes (A), also known as Amps, the outlet can draw when a load is attached to the outlet. Outlets can often be rated as 15 A outlets or 20 A outlets for example and are easily identified by a user as a 15 A outlet or a 20 A outlet, as will be described in more detail below. As is commonly known in the industry, an outlet that is rated for 15 A has two parallel openings providing neutral and line voltages (as shown for example in  FIG.  142   ), while an outlet that is rated for 20 A has a “T-shaped” opening for providing neutral (as shown for example in  FIG.  143   ). While it is important to be able to determine whether a power adapter having an outlet is rated at 15 amps or 20 amps in order to prevent a user from drawing current that is greater than the current rating of the outlet (which may cause a circuit breaker to trip), it is also beneficial to prevent a user from inserting a control module having an outlet with a current rating greater than the current rating of the power adapter in which it is inserted. For example, a control module having an outlet with a 20 A rating should not be inserted in a power adapter having an outlet that is only rated for 15 A. That is, because the circuit breaker in a load box and the wiring provided between the circuit breaker and the power adapter having an outlet may only have a certain rating (i.e., a rating for the power adapter to which the circuit breaker and wiring provide power), it is beneficial to prevent a control module having an outlet with a rating greater than the rating of the power adapter from being inserted into the power adapter. For example, it is beneficial to prevent a control module having an outlet with 20 A from being inserted into a power adapter rated at 15 A, which may cause the circuit breaker for the power adapter to trip if a load drawing more than 15 A is coupled to the outlet of the control module. 
     According to one implementation, a power adapter having an outlet can be configured such that only a control module having an outlet rated at 15 A can be used in a power adapter having an outlet or power adapter having a switch that is rated at 15 A. Similarly, a power adapter having an outlet that is rated at 20 A can be configured such that only a control module having an outlet rated at 20 A can be used with the power adapter having an outlet that is rated at 20 A. 
     According to another implementation, as described in reference to  FIGS.  142 - 143   , a control module that appears to be rated for 15 A (i.e., does not have a “T-slot”) can be rated for 20 A and received by a power adapter having an outlet rated for 20 A. That is, because both the power adapter having an outlet would be wired to a circuit breaker rated at 20 A with wire rated at 20 A and the control module having an outlet which appears to be rated at 15 A is actually rated at 20 A, the outlet which appears to be rated at 15 A can be used in a power adapter having an outlet rated at 20 A. However, it is important that a power adapter having an outlet rated at 15 A or a power adapter having a switch cannot receive a control module that is rated at 20 A. That is, a power adapter having an outlet rated at 15 A or a power adapter having a switch may not be wired to a 20 A circuit breaker or with wiring that is rated for 20 A. 
     Turning first to  FIG.  142   , a front perspective view of a power adapter arrangement  14200  comprising a power adapter having an outlet and a control module having an outlet is shown. The power adapter arrangement  14200  comprises a control module  14202  having attachment elements  14203  that are adapted to be coupled to corresponding attachment elements  14204 . The control module having an outlet comprises openings for receiving products of a plug, including a line opening  14206  for receiving a first prong of a plug, a neutral opening  14207  for receiving a second prong of a plug, and a ground opening  14208  for receiving a third prong of a plug. 
     The power adapter  14210  comprises an outlet portion  14212  also having openings for receiving prongs of a plug, and particularly a neutral opening  14214  for receiving a first prong of a plug, a line opening  14216  for receiving a second prong of a plug, and a ground opening  14218  for receiving a third prong of a plug. It should be noted that the arrangement of openings for the outlet in  FIG.  142    generally designate a 15 amp outlet. The power adapter  14210  also comprises a recess  14220  for receiving the control module  14202 . The recess  14220  comprises a housing portion  14222  having a first plurality of openings  14224  for receiving contact elements of the control module  14202  and a second plurality of openings  14226  for receiving actuators of the control module  14202 . It should be understood that the power adapters and control modules of  FIGS.  142 - 147    are provided to show interoperability of the control modules and the power adapters and could be implemented to include all of the features of the power adapter arrangements as described above, such as the power adapter arrangement as described above in reference to  FIGS.  121 - 125    for example. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  143   , a front perspective view of a power adapter arrangement  14300  comprising a power adapter having a 20 A outlet is shown. As can be seen in  FIG.  143   , the outlets for both the power adapter and the control module comprise different neutral openings for receiving a prong that designate that the power adapter is rated for 20 A. More particularly, the control module  14302  comprises a neutral opening  14304 , a line power opening  14306 , and a ground opening  14308 . The neutral opening  14304  as shown has a T-shaped opening, indicating that the outlet of the control module is rated for 20 amps. Additional features associated with the housing element  14321  for receiving the plurality of actuators are also shown in FIG.  143 . The control module  14302  also comprises a projection  14310 , shown in dashed lines to indicate that the projection  14310  extends from a rear surface of the control module. As will be described in more detail below, the projection  14310  is adapted to enable the control module  14302  to be inserted into a corresponding power adapter  14312  that is rated for 20 amps, but not be inserted to a power adapter that is not rated for 20 amps, such as the power adapter  14210 . 
     The power adapter  14312  also comprises an outlet portion  14314  having a neutral opening  14316  for receiving a first prong of a plug, a line power opening  14318  for receiving a second prong of a plug, and a ground opening  14320  for receiving a third prong of a plug. The power adapter  14312  also comprises a housing portion  14321  having an opening  14322  receiving the corresponding projection  14310 . While the control module  14202  does not comprise a projection such as the projection  14310  and would be allowed to be inserted in the recess of either power adapter  14210  or power adapter  14312 , the projection  14310  of the control module  14302  would prevent the control module  14302  from being inserted into the recess  14220  of the power adapter  14210 . 
     While the implementations of  FIGS.  142 - 143    prevent one type of control module from being used in a certain type of power adapter, a keying feature could also be used. That is, a keying feature comprises elements in each of the power adapters and control modules that enable certain control modules to be used in certain power adapters. As described in reference to  FIGS.  144 - 147   , keying features are used to enable or prevent the insertion of certain control modules in certain power adapters. 
     Turning first to  FIGS.  144 - 145   , a front perspective view of power adapter arrangement  14400  having a keying function is shown. The power adapter  14402  is adapted to receive a control module  14401  and comprises rails  14403  that are adapted to be inserted in corresponding guides  14404  of the control module  14401  which are allowed to receive the rails as the power adapter is inserted into the recess of the control module. As can be seen in the power adapter arrangement  14500  of  FIG.  145   , the power adapter  14502  comprises rails  14503  then are offset compared to the rails  14403 . That is, the rails  14503  are lower in the recess of the power adapter  14502  as shown. The control module  14504  also comprises guides  14506  that align with the rails  14503  when the control module  14504  is inserted into the recess of the power adapter  14502 . However, the guides  14506  would not align with the rails  14403  of the power adapter  14402 . Therefore, the control module  14504 , which may be rated at 20 A for example, would not be allowed to be inserted in the power adapter  14402 . 
     In contrast, the guides  14406 , as shown in the front plan view of the power adapter arrangement  14400  of  FIG.  144    and the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  145   , are generally taller than the guides  14506  of the control module  14504 . As can be seen, the guides  14406  would allow the control module to be inserted in either the power adapter  14402  or the power adapter  14502 , provided that the control module is also rated for 20 amps. In contrast, if the control module were not rated for 20 amps, the guides  14404  could be implemented so that they only receive the rails  14403  of the power adapter  14402 , but not the rails  14503  of the power adapter  14502 . 
     Turning now to  FIGS.  146 - 147   , a front perspective view of power adapter arrangements  14600  and  14700  having a keying function is shown. Rather than having rails that may be in overlapping areas to receive different guides in different control modules, single rails of the power adapters of  FIGS.  146 - 147    are in different locations. More particularly, the power adapter  14602  comprises a rail  14603  which is adapted to be inserted into the guide  14606  of the control module  14604 . The control module  14604  also comprises a guide  14608  to enable the control module  14604  to be inserted into the recess of the power adapter  14702 . The power adapter  14702  comprises a rail  14703  adapted to be received by the guide  14706  of the control module  14704 . Because the control module  14704  does not include a corresponding guide that would receive the rail  14603 , the control module  14704  could not be inserted into the power adapter  14602 . 
     In contrast, the control module  14604  comprises the guide  14608 , allowing the control module  14604  to be inserted into the power adapter  14702 , assuming that the control module  14604  is rated for 20 amps. However, the control module  14604  could be implemented without the guide  14608 , and therefore prevent the control module  14604  from being inserted into the power adapter  14702 . While the examples of keying in  FIGS.  144 - 147    provide just two examples of keying, it should be understood that a variety of other implementations of keying could be used, such as projections extending from the rear surface of the control modules that are adapted to extend into corresponding openings in the back of the recess, and may be selectively placed to receive a control module in a recess of a power adapter or block a control module from being inserted into a recess of a power adapter. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  148   , a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement  14800  having a ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) circuit in the power adapter is shown. The power adapter arrangement comprises a control module  14802  having an outlet  14803  and is adapted to be received by a power adapter  14804 . The power adapter comprises a plurality of contact elements  14806 , including a first contact element  14808 , a second contact element  14810 , a third contact element  14812 , a fourth contact element  14814 , and a fifth contact element  14816 , as will be described in more detail below. While the plurality of contact elements  14806  are shown together on one side of the power adapter, if should be understood that the contact elements could be arranged in different locations as described above, including where the ground contact element is associated with the yoke of the power adapter. 
     The power adapter also comprises a housing portion  14820  having openings, including a first plurality of openings  14822  for receiving contact elements of a control module, and a second plurality of openings  14824  for receiving actuators of a power adapter. The power adapter comprises a raised portion  14826  comprising an outlet  14828 , and a recess  14829 . The raised portion  14826  extends through an opening of a wall plate when the wall plate is attached to the power adapter. The power adapter also comprises a test button  14830  and a reset button  14832 . The test button and the reset button comprise buttons that could be actuated by a user to provide a test or reset function of the power adapter. According to some implementations, the test and reset buttons could be associated with a GFCI circuit, for example, as will be described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  149   . The power adapter may also comprise flanges  14834  for enabling the power adapter to be attached to a junction box and may be associated with a yoke for example. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  149   , a block diagram of the power adapter arrangement  14900 , which corresponds to the power adapter arrangement  14800  of  FIG.  148   , is shown. The power adapter  14804  comprises an AC/DC circuit  14904  for generating a DC signal for providing DC power to the components of a GFCI circuit  14905 . More particularly, the GFCI circuit comprises a control circuit  14906  that is adapted to control line power received by a contact element  14808  and coupled to a switch  14910 . Ground faults most often occur when equipment is damaged or defective, such that live electrical parts are no longer adequately protected from unintended contact by a user. According to the National Electrical Code, a “ground fault” is a conducting connection between any electric conductor and any conducting material that is grounded or that may become grounded. In a ground fault, electricity has found a path to ground, but it is a path the electricity was never intended to be on, such as through a person&#39;s body. A ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) can help prevent electrocution. GFCI&#39;s are designed to sense an imbalance in current flow over the normal path. The GFCI will “sense” the difference in the amount of electricity flowing into the circuit to that flowing out, even in amounts of current as small as 4 or 5 milliamps. The GFCI reacts quickly (less than one-tenth of a second) to trip or shut off the circuit. If your body provides a path to the ground for this current, a person could be shocked or electrocuted, the GFCI senses this condition and cuts off the power before a person can be injured. 
     The GFCI circuit is configured to detect the abnormal changes in current, where the control circuit  14906  is coupled to a first current detector  14912  that detects current flowing through the switch  14910  and a second current detector  14914  that detects a current flowing through the neutral contact element  14810  and a switch  14915 . If the control circuit detects an abnormal amount of current in the current detector  14912  and  14914 , it may determine that a ground fault has occurred, and will open the switch  14910  and the switch  14915  so their current cannot continue the flow in the power adapter. 
     As shown in  FIG.  149   , the line power provided to the control module  14802  is also provided by way of the switch  14910 . That is, the outlet  14803  of the control module  14802  will not receive line power in the event of a detection of a ground fault. Also, the current detector  14914  will detect current from both the neutral line of the power adapter  14804  and the neutral line of the control module. The abnormal currents in both the current detectors will detect current provided to both of the outlets of the power adapter arrangement  14900  and the current that is returned by way of the neutral contact element  14810  to detect a ground fault that may be occurring in either of the outlets of the power adapter arrangement  14900 . That is, the current detector  14912  will detect the current drawn by both outlets by detecting the current through the switch  14910 , and the current returning through the current detector  14914  represents the return current on the neutral lines of both outlets of the power adapter arrangement  14900 . The second switch  14915  is provided in the path from the neutral contact element to the current detector  14914 . When the control circuit disables the path of the line current by opening the switch  14910 , it will also disable the path to the neutral contact element  14810  by opening the switch  14910 . 
     The plurality of openings  14822  comprises a first opening  14916 , a second opening  14918 , a third opening  14920 , a fourth opening  14922 , a fifth opening  14924 , and a sixth opening  14926 . The openings  14916 - 14920  are adapted to receive contact elements of a power adapter, but do not provide any electrical connection. That is, the openings  14916 - 14920  accommodate contact elements of a control module that may have functionality used in other power adapters, but not used by the power adapter  14804  having an outlet. The openings  14922 ,  14924 , and  14926  or associated with contact elements accessible through the openings that make electrical connection to a corresponding line contact elements  14928 , a neutral contact element  14930 , and a ground contact element  14932 . That is, while the openings  14922 ,  14924 , and  14926  are adapted received contact elements that make electrical contacts with the contact elements  14928 ,  14930 , and  14932 , respectively, the openings  14916 ,  14918 , and  14920  are only adapted to receive a contact element but may not enable an electrical connection to any contact elements of the power adapter. The control circuit  14906  also responds to a test signal to perform an internal test to determine if the GFCI circuit is functioning properly. The control circuit  14906  also responds to a reset signal to allow the power adapter to operate again after a ground fault is detected and the condition that caused the ground fault condition and triggered the control circuit has been eliminated. 
     While the power adapter  14804  as shown receives the control module  14802 , it should be understood that any type of control module other than a control module having an outlet could be implemented with the power adapter  14804 . For example, some power adapters may include contact elements for additional features that would not be used when that control module is used in the power adapter having an outlet but may still have functionality that is beneficial. For example, a control module comprising a smart speaker may also control the state of a switch when used in a power adapter having a switch. However, while the control module having a smart speaker may not control power to the outlet when installed in a power adapter having an outlet, the control module having a smart speaker may have other functionality that makes it beneficial to use the control module having a smart speaker in a power adapter having an outlet. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  150   , a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement  15000  having a control module that comprises a GFCI circuit is shown. Unlike the implementation of a GFCI circuit in  FIGS.  148  and  149   , the GFCI circuit is provided in the control module, and provides GFCI protection for the outlet of both the control module and the power adapter. More particularly, the power adapter arrangement comprises a control module  15002  that is adapted to be inserted into a power adapter  15004 . The power adapter comprises a plurality of contact elements  15006 , comprising a first contact element  15008 , a second contact element  15010 , a third contact element  15012 , a fourth contact element  15014 , and the fifth contact element  15016 . The power adapter also comprises a recess  15018  for receiving the control module having a GFCI circuit. The power adapter also comprises a housing portion  15020  having a plurality of openings  15022  for receiving contact elements of the control module  15002 , and a second plurality of openings  15024  for receiving actuator elements of the control module  15002 . The power adapter also comprises a raised housing portion  15026  having an outlet  15028  extending from a rear housing  15032 . As will be described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  151   , the control module  15002  having a GFCI circuit will also provide GFCI protection for the outlet  15028  and any outlet that is wired downstream of the power adapter. As shown in  FIG.  149   , a neutral out contact element  14816  and a line out contact element  14819  are provided to allow for downstream connections to other power adapters and provide GFCI protection to the downstream power adapters. The power adapter may also comprise flanges  14834  for enabling the power adapter to be attached to a junction box and may be associated with a yoke for example. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  151   , an example of a block diagram of the power adapter arrangement  15100  of  FIG.  150    is shown. According to the implementation of  FIG.  151   , the “neutral out” contact element  15014  and the “line out” contact element  15016  enable the connection to downstream power adapters, while providing GFCI protection to the downstream power adapters. That is, the neutral out and line out contact elements are provided by way of the control module  15002 , and therefore provide GFCI protection to any downstream power adapters, such as power adapters having outlets, which have a neutral contact element connected to the neutral contact element  15014  and a line contact element connected to the line out contact element  15016 . More particularly, the control module  15002  comprises a GFCI circuit  15121  for detecting any abnormal currents and disabling the line power to the outlet of the power adapter  15004  and to the outlet of the control module  15002 . 
     The power adapter  15004  comprises a first opening  15102 , a second opening  15104 , a third opening  15106 , a fourth opening  15108 , a fifth opening  15110 , and a sixth opening  15111  of the plurality of openings  15022 . It should be noted that the first opening  15102  does not comprise a contact element for making an electrical connection to a corresponding contact element of a control module, while the remaining openings  15104 - 15111  comprise contact elements that make electrical connections to corresponding contact elements of the control module  15002 , including a first contact element  15112 , a second contact element  15114 , a third contact element  15116 , a fourth contact element  15118 , and a fifth contact element  15120 . 
     The GFCI circuit  15121  comprises an AC/DC circuit  15122  to generate a DC signal to provide power to elements of the GFCI circuit. The GFCI circuit also provides a switch  15124  coupled to the line in contact element  15008 . A second switch  15125  is also provided between the neutral contact element  15010  and the current detector  15130 . A GFCI control circuit  15126  is adapted to control the switches  15124  and  15125  in response to currents detected by a first current detector  15128  and a second current detector  15130 . The GFCI control circuit  15126  will disconnect the line power provided to the outlet  15028  or outlet  15003  if an improper current is detected in the current detectors  15128  and  15130 . The GFCI control circuit  15126  will also disconnect the neutral connection using the switch  15125  if an improper current is detected. The GFCI control circuit  15126  will also provide any necessary reset and test functions in response to actuations of the reset button  15030  and the test button  15034 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  152   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement having a standard outlet in the power adapter of  FIG.  151    is shown. The power control module  15202  comprises an outlet  15204  and a pair of connections that enable the line and neutral voltages to be routed to the line and neutral contact elements of the outlet  15028  and the neutral out contact element  15014  and line out contact element  15016 . More particularly, a first connection  15206  is provided between the power contact element of the outlet  15204  and the contact element  15112 , and a second connection  15208  is provided between the neutral contact element of the outlet  15204  and the contact element  15114  as shown. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  153   , a block diagram of a power adapter arrangement  15300  having an arc fault detection circuit is shown. The power adapter  15301  comprises an AFCI circuit  15302  for detecting an arc fault condition. An arc fault is a powerful electrical discharge between two or more than two conductors and may generate enough heat to break the insulation and cause an electrical fire. The arc can also generate waveforms that can disrupt or destroy sensitive electronics equipment. The arc fault can occur as a series arc fault in the same conductor in series with the load due to damage or loose connection between them or as a parallel arc fault. An Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter also known as an arc fault detection device, is a protective device used for protection against fire hazards caused by arc faults. An Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter can detect arcs in the circuit and break the supply of electricity to the circuit. AFCI also provides protection against overloading and short circuit current using thermal and magnetic protection as used in a normal circuit breaker. 
     A control circuit  15304  provides a similar function as the control circuit in the GFCI circuit, but is coupled to three current detectors, including a first current detector  15306  coupled to the line contact element  15307 , a second current detector  15308  coupled to the neutral contact element  15309 , and a third current detector  15310  coupled to the ground contact element  15311 . The control circuit  15304  is coupled to control a switch  15312  and opens the switch to prevent line current from being provided to either of the outlets of the power adapter arrangement. An AC/DC circuit  15314  is also provided to generate a DC signal that may be used by the power adapter. The power adapter  15301  comprises a plurality of openings, including a first opening  15322 , a second opening  15324 , a third opening  15326 , a fourth opening  15328 , and a fifth opening  15330 , and a sixth opening  15332 . 
     A control module  15319  has an outlet  15320  and comprises a first contact element  15334 , a second contact element  15336 , and a third contact element  15338 . The openings  15328 - 15332  comprise contact elements for making an electrical connection to corresponding contact elements  15334 - 15338 , respectively. As shown in  FIG.  153   , the switch  15312  prevents the line current from being provided to either the first outlet  15341  or the second outlet  15320 , while a second switch  15313  prevents the neutral contact element from being connected to either of the first outlet  15341  and the second outlet  15320 . The control circuit is also coupled to receive a signal by way of the test button  15340  or the test button  15342 . A contact element  15344  is provided to provide a line out signal and a second contact element  15346  is provided to provide a neutral out signal that may be routed to downstream power adapters to provide arc fault protection to the downstream power adapters. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  154   , a bock diagram of a power adapter arrangement  15400  where the control module has in arc fault circuit interrupter is shown. According to the implementation of  FIG.  154   , the arc fault detection circuit is implemented in a control module, where the external appearance of the power adapter  15402  would be similar to the power adapter  15004 , but have different functionality as shown in  FIG.  154   . The power adapter  15402  is adapted to receive a control module  15404 . The power adapter comprises a plurality of contact elements that are adapted to be coupled to wires of a junction box, including a line contact element  15406 , a neutral contact element  15408 , a ground contact element  15410 , a neutral out contact element  15412 , and a line out contact element  15414 . As will be described in more detail below, the connections to the line out and neutral out contact elements are controlled by a pair of switches, and therefore can safely provide a source of power to downstream power adapters as described above. The power adapter also comprises outlet  15415 . 
     The control module  15404  comprises a plurality of openings  15420  including a first opening  15422 , a second opening  15424 , a third opening  15426 , a fourth opening  15428 , a fifth opening  15430 , and a sixth opening  15432 . As shown in  FIG.  154   , each of the openings of the plurality of openings  15420  comprises a contact element for making an electrical connection to a corresponding contact element of the control module  15404 . More particularly, a first contact element  15434  is coupled to a contact element associated with the first opening  15422 , a second contact element  15436  is coupled to a contact associated with the opening  15424 , a third contact element  15438  is coupled to a contact element of the opening  15426 , a fourth contact element  15440  is coupled to a contact element associated with the opening  15428 , a fifth contact element  15442  is coupled to a contact element associated with the opening  15430 , and a sixth contact element  15444  is coupled to a contact element associated with the opening  15432 . An AFCI circuit  15450  comprises an AC/DC circuit  15452  that is coupled to the line voltage and adapted to generate a DC voltage to be used by circuits of the AFCI circuit. A control circuit  15454  of the AFCI circuit is coupled to a plurality of current detectors, including a first current detector  15456 , a second current detector  15458 , and a third current detector  15460 . The current detectors are adapted to detect currents in each of the line contact element  15406 , the neutral contact element  15408 , and ground contact element  15410 . If an arc fault condition is detected by the control circuit  15454 , a switch  15462  prevents the line voltage from being provided to either the first outlet  15415  or the second outlet  15468 , while a second switch  15463  prevents the neutral contact element  15408  from being electrically connected to either the first outlet  15415  or the second outlet  15468 . A test button  15464  and a reset button  15466  are provided on a front surface of the control module. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  155   , a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement having a control module comprising a data connection is shown. The power adapter arrangement  15500  comprises a control module  15502  having data ports, and a power adapter adapted to receive the control module and having corresponding data ports. That is, the power adapter arrangement enables a data connection that is provided to the power adapter to be routed through the recess of the power adapter and to a front surface of the control module. More particularly, the control module  15502  comprises a first connector  15506  that is configured to route data by way of a communication link  15508  to another connector  15510 . The control module  15502  may also comprise a second data port  15512  that is configured to route data by way of a second communication link  15514  to a corresponding connector  15516 . The communication links may comprise for example a plurality of wires of a flex strip or wiring harness, or traces on a circuit board. According to one implementation, the first data port may be configured to route data by way of an Ethernet protocol, and the second data port may be implemented to route data by way of a USB protocol. However, it should be understood that any number of data connections could be provided which may implement any number of different data protocols. 
     The power adapter  15504  comprises a raised portion  15517  comprising an outlet  15518 . The power adapter also comprises a plurality of contact elements  15520  that are adapted to be coupled two wires of a junction box, and include a first contact element  15522 , a second contact element  15524 , and a third contact element  15525 . A recess  15526  is also provided to receive the control module  15502  and comprises a housing portion  15528  having a first plurality of openings  15530  adapted to receive contact elements of a control module, and a second plurality of openings adapted to receive actuators of a control module as described above. 
     The power adapter  15504  also comprises data ports for enabling the control module to provide access to a data port on an outer surface of the power adapter arrangement, such as on the front surface of the control module as shown. That is, the power adapter  15504  comprises a first connector  15532  that is adapted to make an electrical connection to the connector  15510  when the control module  15502  is inserted into the recess  15526 . By way of example, the connector  15510  may be a male connector adapted to mate with a female connector  15532 . The connector  15532  is electrically connected by a communication link to a corresponding connector  15538 . A second data connection is also provided in the power adapter  15504  to enable a connection to the connector  15516 . More particularly, a connector  15540  is adapted to make an electrical connection to the connector  15516  when the control module  15502  is inserted into the recess. The connector  15540  is coupled by a communication link  15542  to a corresponding connector  15544 . The connectors  15538  and  15544  enable a wired connection to another location during the installation of the power adapter arrangement. That is, the connectors  15538  and  15544  are accessible within the junction box, where wires can be routed out of the junction box to a remote location. The power adapter may also comprise flanges  15550 , which may be associated with a yoke for example, which enable the power adapter to be attached to a junction box. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  156   , a perspective view of a power adapter  15600  having an outlet and comprising a data connection is shown. Unlike the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  155    having a data connection that is provided through the control module, the power adapter  15602  provides one or more data connectors on a front surface of the power adapter that is accessible through a wall plate when a wall plate is attached to the power adapter arrangement. The power adapter  15602  comprises a raised portion  15604  having an outlet  15606  and a recess  15608 . The power adapter also comprises a housing portion  15610  having a first plurality of openings  15612  adapted to receive contact elements of a control module and a second plurality of openings  15614  adapted to receive actuators of a control module. The power adapter also comprises a plurality of contact elements  15616 , including a first contact element  15618 , a second contact element  15620 , and a third contact element  15622  that are adapted to receive wires of a junction box, such as a ground, neutral and line wire for example. 
     The power adapter also comprises a connector  15624  coupled to a communication link  15626  that is routed to a corresponding connector  15628 . A second data connection may also be provided and comprises a connector  15630  coupled to a communication link  15632  and a second connector  15634 . The function of the connectors  15628  and  15634  are similar to the connectors  15532  and  15440  by enabling the routing of data to the power adapter through the junction box. The connectors  15624  and  15630 , which are accessible on a front surface of the power adapter when the wall plate is attached to the power adapter, may implement any data communication protocol, such as an Ethernet protocol for connector  15624  and a USB protocol for connector  15630 , for example. However, it should also be understood that any data communication protocols could be implemented in any number of data connectors on the raised portion  15604 . Flange  15636  are provided to enable attaching the power adapter to the junction box. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  157   , a perspective view of a system  15700  controlled by a power adapter having a control module comprising a plurality of actuators for controlling a plurality of loads is shown. According to the implementation of  FIG.  157   , a power adapter  15701  comprises a switch actuator  15702  and a control module  15703  having a plurality of buttons, shown here by way of example as a first switch actuator  15704 , a second switch actuator  15706 , and a third switch actuator  15708 . The control module  15703  is adapted to be inserted into a recess of the power adapter  15701  and removably coupled to the power adapter. The control module  15703  is adapted to receive power for enabling one or more wireless connections to a plurality of power adapter arrangements or other switching devices controlling a plurality of loads. More particularly, the switch actuator  15702  is configured to control the application of the power to the load  15710 . 
     The control module  15703  comprises one or more wireless communication circuits for enabling a wireless connection to communicate with control modules in other power adapters. For example, the switch actuator  15704  is adapted to control a power adapter  15712  having a control module  15713  comprising a wireless communication circuit. The power adapter  15712  controls the application of the power to the load  15714  in response to a wireless signal transmitted on a communication link  15716  and received by the control module  15713 . The switch actuator  15706  is adapted to control a power adapter  15718  having a control module  15719  comprising a wireless communication circuit. The power adapter  15718  controls the application of the power to the load  15720  in response to a wireless signal transmitted on a communication link  15722  and received by the control module  15719 . The switch actuator  15708  is adapted to control a power adapter  15724  having a control module  15725  comprising a wireless communication circuit. The power adapter  15724  controls the application of the power to the load  15726  in response to a wireless signal transmitted on a communication link  15728  and received by the control module  15725 . 
     The system may also comprise a portable device  15730 , such as a mobile phone or a computer such as a table computer for example, for programming and controlling the control module  15703  by way of a communication link  15732 . The portable device  15730  may also control individual power adapter arrangements, such as the control module  15713  by way of a wireless connection  15734 . Such an application of a control module is beneficial in an arrangement having different lighting groups such as in a kitchen or family room for example. 
       FIGS.  158 - 160    are now shown to provide examples of how the various power adapter arrangements can help reduce the wiring requirements for implementing a 3-way switching arrangement or a switched outlet. Turning first to  FIG.  158   , a plan view of a switched outlet arrangement  15800  shows an elimination of wiring associated with a switched outlet. More particularly, a switch  15802  shown inserted in a junction box  15804  is coupled to control an outlet  15806  in a junction box  15808  by way of wiring  15812 , which may be routed for example through conduit between the junction boxes  15804  and  15808  on opposite sides of a door  15814 . By providing a wireless connection  15810  between the switch  15802  and the outlet  15806 , it is possible to eliminate the wiring  15812 , which comprises material costs associated with both the conduit and wiring, and labor costs for installing the conduit and routing the wire between the junction boxes. According to one implementation, the switch  15802  can be installed in a multi-gang junction box that may comprise a switch controlling a different load or a receptacle. According to another implementation, the switch  15802  could be attached to a wall without the use of a junction box. 
     According to the implementation of  FIG.  159   , the switch  15902  can receive electrical power from the wiring in the junction box  15804  in a system arrangement  15900 . That is, even though the switch  15902  provides a wireless control of the outlet  15806  and it is not necessary to route conduit on opposite sides of a door  15914 , the switch  15902  receives power by way of a line wire provided to the junction box  15804 , eliminating the need for battery power of the switch  15902  to enable the wireless connection  15810  between the switch  15902  and the outlet  15806 . Such an arrangement is particularly beneficial when a multi-gang junction box is used because there will be minimal cost associated with providing the power to the switch  15902 , while still allowing the elimination of wiring  15812  between the junction box  15804  and the junction box  15808 . 
       FIG.  160    shows a similar arrangement  16000  of switches having a wireless connection which enabled the elimination of wiring between the switches of a 3-way switching arrangement. The 3-way switching arrangement of  FIG.  160    comprises a junction box  16002  having a switch  16004  and a junction box  16006  having a switch  16008 . According to the configuration of the 3-way switch of  FIG.  160   , the wiring  16010  between the junction boxes can be eliminated, where the control of the load  16012  is controlled by the wireless connection  16013 . The amount of wiring in conduit necessary between junction boxes of a 3-way switching arrangement is apparent in  FIG.  160   , where the conduit may be required to be routed around a door  16014 , windows  16016  and  16018 , and another door  16020 . Therefore, the ability to eliminate the wiring can lead to substantial cost reductions in the implementation of the system. According to one implementation, the switch  16004  may receive power from a line wire in the junction box  16002  as shown, enabling the switch  16004  to be implemented without a battery. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  161   , a block diagram of a system  16100  comprising a dimmer having an extended dimming range for controlling a load is shown. A power adapter  16102  comprises a control module having a dimmer actuator  16104  for controlling power to a load  16112 . A control circuit  16106  is adapted to control a relay  16108  and a TRIAC  16110 . The control circuit will selectively enable the relay  16108  or the TRIAC  16110 , depending upon the dimming level. That is, when no dimming is needed, the relay is used. However, when dimming is required, the TRIAC is used, where the highest dimming level of the TRIAC is lower than the maximum power provided to the load by way of the relay. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  162   , a block diagram of a receiver circuit that could be used in a power adapter having a switch is shown. The receiver circuit  16200  comprises a plurality of resistors in series, including a first resistor  16202  and a second resistor  16204 . A capacitor  16206  is coupled to a node between the resistors and a ground node. A low voltage signal generated at the node between the two resistors is provided to a voltage regulator  16208  to generate a stable internal output voltage for the latch  16210 . A pulse detector  16212  is provided to receive a signal from a traveler line, where the output of the pulse detector is coupled to the latch  16210  to enable a change of the state of the latch. The latch is provided to control the relay  16214 , and particularly to switch the relay. That is, the relay  16214  receives the line voltage and generates a line output signal in response to an output of the latch  16210 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  163   , another block diagram of a receiver circuit  16300  that could be implemented in a power adapter having a switch is shown. A multiway power adapter may need to identify when the traveler line is connected to the line voltage, and then switch a switch on or off when that occurs. The high-level operation used to achieve this within the master power adapter can be implemented using the circuit of  FIG.  163   . Generally, a signal from the traveler line passes through a peak detector circuit, which determines if a latch should be set, or reset. Based on the output of the latch, an H-Bridge is then used to control the relay and toggle it on or off. As shown in  FIG.  162   , there may be a need for a linear regulator circuit to generate a DC voltage. Generating a DC voltage may present a challenge, as conventional methods of AC/DC conversion impact size and cost. The circuit of  FIG.  163    may be implemented to achieve a cheaper and smaller circuit for generating a DC voltage. 
     More particularly, a voltage regulator  16302  receives a line input signal, and generates a first output voltage, shown here by way of example as a 24 Volt DC output voltage, and a second output voltage, shown here by way of example is a 5 Volt DC output voltage for providing DC signals to a control circuit  16304  and a relay circuit  16305 . The peak detector  16306  is coupled to the traveler line and generates an output provided to the latch  16308 . Outputs of the latch are coupled to an H bridge  16312  which controls a relay  16314  for routing the line voltage to an output of the relay. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  164   , a block diagram of a voltage regulator that could be implemented in a power adapter having a switch is shown. More particularly, the voltage regulator  16302  comprises a rectifier  16402  coupled to receive the line voltage. A resistor  16404  is coupled between an output of the rectifier  16402  and another rectifier  16406 . The output of the rectifier  16406  is coupled to a voltage regular  16410 . A capacitor  16408  is coupled between the node at the output of the rectifier  16406  and the input of the voltage regulator. The voltage regulator generates a first fixed DC voltage, shown here by way of example is a 24 Volt DC signal. A resistor  16412  coupled to the output of the voltage regulator and in series with another resistor  16414 , which enables generating a second DC voltage at a node between the resistors, shown here by way of example is a 5 Volt DC signal. The line voltage (120 VAC) charges  16408  which may then be used to supply the input voltage for the voltage regulator. The voltage regulator then controls both the relay and is also divided via resistors to create a 5V rail for the logic in the circuit. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  165   , a block diagram of circuit  16500  comprising a control circuit and a relay circuit that could be implemented in a power adapter having a switch is shown. More particularly, the control circuit  16304  comprises a resistor  16502  coupled to the traveler line to receive a signal over the traveler line. A second resistor  16504  is a coupled in series with the resistor  16502  at a node at an input of a rectifier  16506 . The rectifier is coupled to a latch  16512 , shown here by way of example of it as a D flip flop. A capacitor  16508  and a resistor  16510  are coupled in parallel between the input of the latch and ground. An enable input of the latch is also coupled to the input of the latch  16512 . The traveler line voltage passes through the peak detector circuit comprising the circuit elements coupled to the D input of the latch, such that the relay is toggled on/off upon detecting a peak on the traveler line. The relay circuit  16310  may comprise a pair of transistors  16514  and  16516  at one terminal of a relay  16518 , and a second pair of transistors  16520  and  16522  couple to another terminal of the relay. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  166   , a block diagram of another power supply circuit  16600  is shown. The power supply circuit comprises a rectifier  16602  coupled to receive the line voltage at an input, an output of which is provided to a transistor circuit  16604 . The transistor circuit generates a reference voltage, shown here by way of example as a 24 V DC circuit. The voltage regulator  16606  generates a 3.3V DC signal. The main difference between the power supply of  FIG.  165    and the linear regulator solution of  FIG.  166    is the location of the voltage regulator. The transistor circuit divides the voltage down to a value between 12V and 24V, and then uses a regulator to create the lower voltage rail, whereas the implementation of  FIG.  165    places the regulator right after the line voltage (after rectifying and averaging the 120 VAC), and a lower voltage rail is created via resistors. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  167   , a circuit diagram of the transistor circuit and voltage regulator of  FIG.  166    is shown. The transistor circuit  16604  comprises a rectifier  16702  coupled to receive a line voltage, and an output of the rectifier is provided to a first node associated with three parallel paths. A first path comprises a resistor  16704  coupled between the first node and a rectifier  16706 . A second rectifier  16708  is coupled between a ground node and the input of the rectifier  16706 . A resistor  16710  is coupled between a neutral terminal and the ground node. A second path comprises a transistor  16712  having a collector coupled to the first node and a base coupled to the output of the rectifier  16706 . An emitter of the transistor  16712  is coupled to an input of the rectifier  16714 . An output of the rectifier  16714  is a DC regulator voltage, shown by way of example as a 24 Volt DC signal. A capacitor  16715  is coupled between the rectifier  16714  and the ground terminal. A third path comprises a resistor  16716  coupled between the first node and a resistor  16722  coupled to the ground node. A resistor  16718  is coupled between a 3.3 Volt DC signal and the collector of a transistor  16720  having an emitter coupled to ground and a base coupled to the node between the resistors  16716  and  16722 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  168   , a block diagram of a transmitter circuit is shown. The transmitter  16800  comprises a transistor  16804  having a gate to receive data and a drain coupled to a resistor  16802 . A signal generated at the resistor  16802 , shown here by way of example as a sine signal, is routed on a traveler line and an output of the capacitor  16806  as shown. Accordingly, the sine wave signal is transmitted when the transistor  16804  is turned on. 
     Certain control modules may require the ability to communicate with one another during their operation when connected in a multiway configuration. The ability to communicate presents a challenge, as the control modules may be limited to six connections (Line, Neutral, Ground, Load, Traveler, and Switch). According to one implementation, Powerline Communication (PLC) could be used. Specifically, the control module would make use of the traveler line, and couple a high frequency signal with embedded data, which may comprise any digital protocol (e.g., Serial data, pulse width modulated (PWM) data, etc.) to communicate with the other control modules on the traveler line. According to the circuit of  FIG.  168   , a data signal controls the gate of a transistor  16804 , which couples a high frequency sine wave to the traveler line as shown in the timing diagram of  FIG.  169   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  169   , a timing diagram shows a signal transmitted by the transmitter circuit of  FIG.  168   . The above signal alternates between a high frequency sine wave and 0V. A receiver circuit of the receiving control module, such as the receiver circuit of  FIG.  170    will be able to record the waveform and decode the original data. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  170   , a block diagram of a receiver circuit  17000  for receiving a signal is shown. The receiver circuit  17000  comprises an input for receiving data at a terminal of a capacitor  17022 , where a second terminal of the capacitor is coupled to a first bias resistor  17024  that is coupled between the capacitor and receives a voltage bias signal V bias. The capacitor  17022  is also coupled to a terminal of a second capacitor  17026 , where a second terminal of the capacitor  17022  is coupled to a second bias resistor  17028  that receives the voltage bias signal and an input of an operational amplifier  17029 . An output of the operational amplifier  17029  is coupled to the other input terminal of the operational amplifier by way of a feedback path having a resistor  17032  coupled to the input. A voltage bias is also provided by way of a resistor  17030 . An output of the operational amplifier  17029  is coupled to a diode  17034 , which may be a Zener diode for example, an output of which is coupled to an input of the second operational amplifier  17044 . A capacitor  17036  and a resistor  17038  are coupled between the output of the diode  17034  and ground. A resistor divider network comprising a first resistor  17040  and a second resistor  17042  provide a voltage to the second input of the operational amplifier  17044 , which generates an output of the receiver circuit. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  171   , a timing diagram showing a signal received by the receiver circuit of  FIG.  170    is shown. Despite a slight phase shift, the information is reconstructed in its entirety. It should be understood that this data could be transmitted using any protocol, such as a serial or a pulse width modulated signal. While examples of circuits for implementing power supplies to generate reference voltages and transmitter and receiver circuits are shown by way of example, it should be understood that other power supply circuits and transmitter and receiver circuits could be implemented. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  172   , a perspective view of a latch is shown. A latch  17202  comprises a surface  17204  that enables a user to press to rotate the latch to access a grip element  17206 , as will be described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  173   . When the latch  17202  is rotated, a finger grip  17208  is accessible by a user to enable a user to remove the control module from the recess. An opening  17210  is provided to enable the latch to be attached to a control module. A guide  17212  is also shown and described above in reference to other latch. A beveled edge  17214  is also provided with the latch. The beveled edge enables the control module to be inserted into the recess of the power adapter regardless of the state of rotation of the latch  17202 . That is, a corresponding latch of the power adapter may be spring loaded to enable the latch to ride over the beveled edge  17214  and the surface  17216 , and drop down into the guide  17212 , as will be described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  173   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  173   , a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement  17300  having the latch of  FIG.  172    is shown. A control module  17302  comprises an attachment element  17304 , which may be for example a screw or rivet made of any suitable material such as plastic or metal, for attaching the latch  17202  to the control module  17302  and enabling the latch to rotate to unlatch the control module. The control module  17302  comprises a guide  17306  that is adapted to receive a corresponding latch element  17308  of the power adapter  17310 . That is, as the control module is inserted into the recess of the power adapter and the latch element  17308  advances in the guide  17306 , it will reach the end of the guide and be ready to enter the corresponding guide  17212 . However, if the opening of the guide  17212  is not aligned with the end of the guide  17306 , the latch element  17308  can ride over the beveled edge  17214  and the surface  17216  to drop into the guide  17212 . For example, the control module can be inserted when the latch is in the state as shown in  FIG.  173   , which is a locked state. However, the latch will need to be rotated to allow the corresponding latch element  17308  to exit the guide  17212  when removing the control module. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  174   , a perspective view of a latch is shown. A latch  17402  is also a modified version of a previous latch such as latch  12115 , and also allows the control module to be inserted into the power adapter regardless of the state of the latch. The latch  17402  also comprises a surface  17404  to enable rotating the latch so that a grip element  17406  is accessible and the latch can be rotated. The latch also comprises an opening  17408  to enable the latch to rotate to expose a finger grip  17410 . An inner portion of a guide  17414  enables a corresponding latch element of the power adapter to advance along an inner portion of the guide and end up in a recessed portion  17412  when the latch is in a latched state. A surface  17416  enables the control module to be inserted into the recess even when the latch is in the closed position (i.e., when the control module would be latched), where the latch  17402  will rotate slightly when a corresponding latch element of the power adapter engages the surface  17416 , as will be described in reference to  FIG.  175   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  175   , a perspective view of power adapter arrangement  17500  having the latch element of  FIG.  174    is shown. A control module  17502  comprises attachment element  17504  that is adapted to attach the latch  17402  to the control module. A guide  17506  also enables a corresponding latch element to be received by the latch  17402 . More particularly, the power adapter  17508  comprises a corresponding latch element  17510  that is adapted to enter the guide  17506  and be latched in the recessed portion  17412 . As the control module  17502  is advanced and the latch element  17510  moves through the guide  17506 , the latch  17402  will be rotated as the latch element  17510  advances along the surface  17416 . The control module can be latched by returning the latch  17402  to the latched state, where the latch element  17510  is in the recessed portion  17412 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  176   , a perspective view of a latch element is shown. A latch  17602  comprises a pivot point that is placed towards a lever element to enable a user to remove a control module using a lever force associated with the latch. More particularly, the latch  17602  comprises a surface  17604  that enables a user to rotate the latch, where a grip element  17606  is exposed and enables a user to continue to advance the latch and access a finger grip  17608 . The latch  17602  also comprises a lever surface  17610  that is adapted to engage a corresponding lever surface of the power adapter, as will be described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  177   . The latch  17602  comprises an opening  17612  to enable the latch to rotate and function as a lever. A guide  17614  Is provided for receiving a corresponding latch of a power adapter. A beveled edge  17616  is also provided to allow the control module to be inserted while the latch is in the position associated with the latched state, as described above in reference to  FIG.  172   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  177   , a perspective view of power adapter arrangement  17700  having the latch of  FIG.  176    is shown. The power adapter arrangement  17700  shows elements of the control module  17702  that enable the control module to be inserted into a power adapter. More particularly, a projection  17704  creates a guide  17706  for receiving a corresponding rail of the power adapter. A second guide  17708  is adapted to receive a corresponding latch element  17716  of the power adapter. The power adapter  17710  comprises a rail  17712  that is adapted to mate with the corresponding guide  17706 . When the control module is inserted into the power adapter, a corresponding latch element  17716  is adapted to enter the guide  17708  and be received by the guide  17614  to latch the control module. According to one implementation, the latch element  17716  may be spring loaded to enable passing over the beveled edge  17616  and enter the guide  17614 . That is, a spring-loaded latch element may be any latch having a latching element, such as a flange at an end of a flexure as shown in  FIG.  177   , the operation of which may be affected by a spring. A spring force necessary may be a portion that is integral to the latch (e.g., a flexure affecting the motion of a flange as shown in  FIG.  177   , or a separate spring (such as a coil spring) associated with a housing. According to the implementation of  FIG.  176   , the spring functionality for the latch element  17716  is provided by a flexure  17718  as shown. That is, the flexure allows the latch element  17716  to move upward and over the beveled edge. While latch elements having a flange at the end of a flexure in a number of implementations, it should be understood that a latch element having any type of spring action could be implemented. 
     In addition to helping align the control module with the power adapter as the control module is inserted into the recess, the latch  17602  also provides a lever function for helping extract the control module from the power adapter. More particularly, the lever surface  17610  is adapted to abut with the end  17714  of the rail  17712 . When the surface  17604  is pushed and the grip element  17606  can be accessed, the lever surface  17610  abuts the end  17714 . As the latch  17602  is rotated, the lever force of the latch  17602  helps extract the control module from the recess. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  178   , a perspective view of a latch element is shown. The implementation of a latch  17802  of  FIG.  178    also operates on the principle of a lever and has a longer lever arm relative to the latch  17602  of  FIG.  176   . The latch  17802  comprises a projection  17806  that can be used to cause the latch  17802  to be rotated to provide access to a finger grip  17808 . The latch  17802  also comprises an opening  17810  for receiving an attachment element, such as a screw or rivet that enables the latch element to rotate with respect to the control module. The end  17812  of the surface  17804  comprises a surface  17814  that is adapted to engage a corresponding surface of the power adapter to enable the control module to be extracted from the recess using, at least in part, a lever force. The latch  17802  also comprises a recess  17816  for receiving a corresponding latch element of the power adapter. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  179   , a perspective view of power adapter arrangement  17900  having the latch of  FIG.  178    is shown. A control module  17902  is adapted receive the latch  17802 , which is adapted to rotate with respect to the control module using an attachment element  17903 . The control module comprises a guide  17904  created by a projection  17906 . The guide  17904  is adapted to receive a rail  17908 . The projection  17906  also creates a second guide  17909  that is adapted to receive a latch element  17910 . The rail  17908  abuts the surface  17814  on the end  17812  to enable a lever function for extracting the control module from the recess. When the latch  17802  is rotated, such as to approximately 90 degrees or less, the recess  17816  aligns with the latch element  17910  to receive the latch element and enable latching the control module to the power adapter. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  180   , a perspective view of a latch is shown. A latch  18002  comprises a handle element  18004  between a pair of support elements  18006  and  18008 . A release element  18012  creates an opening  18014 . As will be described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  181   , when the handle element is pulled, an edge  18016  will advance along a latch and cause the control module to be released from the power adapter. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  181   , a perspective view of power adapter arrangement  18100  having the latch of  FIG.  180    is shown. The control module  18102  comprises a rear portion  18104  to act as a stop for the latch  18002  when the latch element is in the latched position. A projection  18108  at the end of a flexible portion  18110  is accessible by way of a recess  18112  is adapted to be received by a corresponding latch  18114  of the power adapter  18116 . That is, as the handle element is advanced away from the rear portion  18104 , the edge  18016  advances over the flexible portion  18110 , causing the projection  18108  to move downward and be released from the latch  18114 . 
     Turning now to  182 , a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement  18200  is shown. The power adapter arrangement comprises a power adapter  18202  having a control module  18204  comprising a latch  18206 . In the latched position, the latch surrounds an outlet  18208 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  183   , a perspective view showing a control module separated from a power adapter of the power adapter arrangement  18200  of  FIG.  182    is shown. The latch comprises recesses  18302  that are adapted to latch to corresponding latch  18304 . The latch  18304  are released from the recesses  18302  when the latch element  18206  is rotated. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  184   , a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement  18400  is shown. The implementation the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  184    is similar to the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  182   , except that the latch surrounds an outlet of the control module  18405  when the control module is latched to the power adapter. More particularly, the power adapter arrangement comprises a power adapter  18402  having an outlet  18404 . The control module comprises a latch  18408  that surrounds the outlet  18406 . The latch  18408  comprises recesses on either side to engage with corresponding latch elements of the power adapter. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  185   , a perspective view shows a control module separated from a power adapter of the power adapter arrangement  18400  of  FIG.  184   . The control module  18405  comprises recesses  18502  (i.e., one on each side of the latch element) associated with the latch  18405  that are adapted to engage corresponding latch elements  18504 . That is, the latch elements  18504  may comprise prongs that extend from side walls of the recess and occupy the recesses  18510  when the latch element  18504  is moved to the closed position as shown in  FIG.  185   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  186   , a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement comprising a power adapter having a projection for receiving contact elements of the power adapter is shown. A power adapter arrangement  18600  comprises a power adapter  18602  having an extended region  18604  associated with a rear housing  18605  that is adapted to accommodate contact elements, such as contact elements  18607 , shown here by way of example as wires. However, it should be understood that the contact elements  18607 , which are adapted to be coupled to wires of a junction box, could comprise screw contacts or other contacts for receiving a wire of a junction box. The power adapter also comprises a front housing  18606  that is coupled to the rear housing and a flange  18608 . The power adapter also comprises a switch  18612  and is coupled to a control module  18614 . The control module comprises latch elements  18616  and guides  18615  adapted to receive corresponding guides of the power adapter, as will be described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  187   . The latch elements  18616  are in an open state as shown and can be moved upward into latch elements  18617  to secure the control module  18614  to the power adapter  18602 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  187   , another perspective view of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  186    is shown. A recess adapted to receive the control module comprises sidewalls  18702 , and a rear surface  18703 . A conductor element  18704  is adapted to provide access to contact elements by way of openings  18706 . The conductor element  18704  may comprise a printed circuit board for example. According to some implementations, the conductor element  18704  may comprise a tamper resistance element to prevent contact elements of the control module from being coupled to contact elements that are exposed by the openings  18706 . As can be seen, guides  18615  are adapted to receive rails  18705 . The perspective view of  FIG.  188    shows the rear of the power adapter arrangement  18600 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  189   , a perspective view shows the rear of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  186    with the rear housing removed. As can be seen, a housing  18902  is adapted to receive the conductor element  18704 . Contact elements  18908  are shown extending from the back of the conductor element  18704 . A switch block  18910  is also shown. The switch block comprises elements for enabling the operation of the switch  18612 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  190   , a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement having a control module with a removable control element is shown. The power adapter arrangement  19000  of  FIG.  190    comprises a control module  19002  that is received by any power adapter, such as the power adapter  18602  for example. The control module  19002  comprises a removable control element  19004  having an up button  19006  and a down button  19008  and adapted to be attached to a control module base  19005 . The removable control element  19004  also comprises a display element  19010 , shown by way of example here as a plurality of LED lights. The removable control element may be a dimmer controller as shown for example. However, it should be understood that the removable control element may comprise any type of interface for controlling the application of a power to the load. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  191   , a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement  19100  having a control module with a removable control element removed from the control module base  19005  of the control module is shown. The control module base  19005  comprises a recessed portion  19102  having contact elements  19104  adapted to mate with corresponding contact elements  19108  of the removable control element  19004 . The control module  19002  may comprise circuits  19106  associated with the base to enable the transfer of signals by way of contact elements to corresponding contact elements of the power adapter  18602 . It should be understood that latch elements may be provided to secure the removable control element to the control module base, and additional latch elements to secure the control module base to the power adapter as described above. 
     Wireless control of a control module with an outlet is beneficial because it eliminates the need to wire the outlet to be a switched outlet. Providing a switched outlet not only requires a junction box at a switch location, but adds time and expense associated with labor for installing conduit and wiring between the junction box at the switch location, such as near a door for example, and the switched outlet. Therefore, eliminating wiring associated with a switched outlet is beneficial. Similarly, eliminating the conduit and wiring between a remote switch and the load switch of a 3-way switch is also beneficial. However, the elimination of the wiring also has disadvantages. The remote switch in either case requires a battery that must be replaced at some point by the homeowner. Further, the homeowner loses a location to place a control module. That is, every time a line-powered junction box is eliminated, the homeowner loses a location to place a control module according to the systems of implementing power adapters having control modules. According to one implementation, a wired junction box may be provided for a remote switch (i.e., a remote switch for a 3-way switch or a switched outlet). Wherever a 3-way switch is desired, a junction box receiving line, neutral and ground will be provided. However, no wiring between that junction box having the remote switch and the junction box having the switched outlet or the junction box having the load side switch of the 3-way switch is provided. This arrangement provides the benefits that a homeowner never has to replace a battery, and will have additional locations for placing control modules. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  192   , a perspective view of a cover having a spring-loaded latch element associated with a cover  19202  is shown. The cover  19202  comprises a front surface  19204  and supporting structures  19206  and  19208  to allow the cover to be seated properly within the recess of a power adapter. The cover  19202  also comprises a latch element  19209  having a flexure  19210  that leads to a flange  19211  that is adapted to be received by a recess of the power adapter to retain the cover  19202  in the power adapter. The latching actuator  19212  comprises a terminal portion  19214  which is adapted to be pressed to release the cover from the power adapter. The latching actuator  19212  is movable on a hinge portion  19218 . When the latching actuator  19212  is pressed inward towards the surface  19220 , the latching actuator will cause the flange  19211  to be released from the recess of the power adapter, allowing the cover  19202  to be removed. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  193   , a perspective view showing components of the cover of  FIG.  192    is shown. A flange actuator  19302  comprises an opening  19304  enabling the flange actuator to be attached to the cover using a projection  19306 . The flange actuator is adapted to be coupled to a spring element  19308  extending from a first terminal end  19310  to a second terminal end  19312 . A ramped edge  19314  engages the flexure  19210  to move the flange  19211  downward. The spring element  19308  enables the latching actuator  19212  and the flange actuator  19302  to be returned to a resting state after the latch actuator is released. While the spring-loaded latch element is shown by way of example on a cover, it should be understood that the latch element could be implemented on any device that may be inserted into the recess of the power adapter. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  194   , a perspective view of another cover having another latch element is shown. The cover  19402  of  FIG.  194    comprises a movable latch element that does not require a spring. The cover also comprises supporting structures  19404  and  19406  to maintain the cover within the recess but reducing the amount of plastic required by creating a cavity  19407 . A latch actuator  19408  comprises a surface  19410  that can be pressed into a gap  19412  in the housing to enable the latch actuator  19408  to be released, allowing a user to fully release the cover from the power adapter. The cover  19402  also comprises a surface  19414  comprising a latch element  19416  having a flexure  19418  that leads to a flange  19420  that is adapted to be received by a recess of the power adapter to retain the cover  19402  in the power adapter. That is, after the surface  19410  is pressed, a portion of the latch actuator  19408  is exposed, allowing a user to further rotate the latch actuator and release the flange  19420  from the recess. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  195   , a perspective view shows the components of the cover of  FIG.  194   . The latch actuator  19408  comprises a base portion  19502  having a guide  19504 . A bottom portion of the guide  19505  may comprise a beveled edge that engages with a flange  19602  of the on the bottom portion of the flexure  19418 . That is, the guide engages a corresponding flange  19602  that can be seen through an opening  19604 . As the latch actuator  19408  is rotated, the beveled edge engages the flange  19602  and causes the flange  19420  to move downward, causing the flange  19420  to be released from an opening of the power adapter adapted to receive the flange  19420 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  197   , a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement having a rotating latch element is shown. The power adapter arrangement  19700  comprises a power adapter  19702  having a yoke  19704  and an outlet portion  19706 . The control module  19708  comprises a latch  19710  having a recess  19712  for enabling a user to move the latch element along a hinge  19714 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  198   , a perspective view of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  197    having the control module removed is shown. The latch  19710  comprises a recess  19802  adapted to be coupled to a corresponding attachment element  19806  and  19809  of the recess of the power adapter  19702 . The module  19708  also comprises guides  19804  for attaching to corresponding rails  19809  and  19810  of a recess  19808  of the power adapter. A housing portion  19812  comprises openings  19814  adapted to expose contact elements of the power adapter  19702  when a tamper resistance element is moved, as described above. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  199   , a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement having a sliding latch element is shown. A power adapter arrangement  19900  comprises a power adapter  19902  having a yoke  19904  and an outlet portion  19906 . A latch  19910  and a latch  19912  are positioned on the sides of the module  19908 . The latches can be pulled outward using the finger recess  19914  to enable releasing the control module  19908  from the power adapter as will be described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  200   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  200   , a perspective view of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  199    having the control module removed is shown. More particularly, the latch element  19910  comprises a base portion  20002  extending to a wall  20004 . A side portion  20006  creates an opening as shown. As the latch element  19910  is pulled forward, the wall engages a corresponding wall  20008  of the housing. A similar arrangement is provided for the latch element  19912 , which comprises a base portion  20009  extending to a wall  20010  of an opening  20012 . A side portion  20011  creates an opening  20012 . As the latch element  19912  is pulled forward, the wall  20010  engages a corresponding wall  20008  of the housing. Similarly, the wall  20010  engages the corresponding wall  20014 . In operation, as the latch element  19912  is pulled forward, a leading edge  20016  of the base portion  20009  advances along a flexure  20018 , causing a flange  20020  to be moved inward and out of a recess of the power adapter, such as recess  20021  as shown, allowing the control module to be removed. Guides  20022  are positioned on either side of a recess  20024  of the control module  19908  and are adapted to engage corresponding rails  20026 . The guides and rails help align the control module with the power adapter. A housing portion  20030  comprises openings  20032  to expose contact elements of the power adapter  19902  when a tamper resistance element is moved, as described above. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  201   , a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement having a spring-loaded latch element is shown. The power adapter arrangement  20100  comprises a power adapter  20102  having a flange  20104  and an outlet  20106 . Openings  20108  and  20110  expose portions of a latch  20112  that enable a user to press the latch  20112  down, to release the control module  20114  from the power adapter, as will be described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  201   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  202   , a perspective view of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  201    having the control module removed is shown. The latch  20112  is a spring-loaded element and comprises a surface  20202  at the end of a side rail  20204  extending from a hinge  20206  to a flange  20208 . The latch  20112  also comprises a surface  20210  of a side portion  20212  extending from a hinge  20214  to a flange  20216 . When the surface  20202  and the surface  20210  are pressed, the flanges are released from corresponding recesses of the power adapter, as will be described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  204   . The control module  20114  also comprises guides  20218  on either side of the control module that are adapted to receive corresponding rails  20222  in a recess  20220  of the power adapter. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  203   , a perspective view of the back of the control module of  FIG.  201    is shown. As can be seen in  FIG.  203   , contact elements  20302  extend from a first rear portion  20306  and above a second rear portion  20308 , which is adapted to abut a corresponding rear portion of the power adapter. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  204   , a perspective view of the power adapter of  FIG.  201    is shown. As can be seen in the perspective view of  FIG.  204   , sidewalls  20402  comprise the rails  20222 , and also a rear portion  20404  is adapted to abut the rear portion  20308  of the control module. As can be seen in the perspective view of  FIG.  204   , recesses  20406  and  20408  are adapted to receive the flanges  20208  and  20216  of the latch  20112 . A housing portion  20410  comprises openings  20412  to receive the contact elements  20302 . It should be understood that appropriate tamper resistance for contact elements of the power adapter could be provided as described above. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  205   , a perspective view of connectors of the power adapter of  FIG.  204    is shown. According to one implementation, a power adapter adapted to receive the control module of  FIG.  203    may comprise connectors that are flexible when contact is made with the contact elements  20302 . Six connectors are shown, each of which extends from a terminal portion which enables an electrical connection to a portion of the power adapter to a contact element that enables a connection to a contact element  20302 . More particularly, a first connector extends from a terminal portion  20502  to a contact element  20504 , a second connector extends from a terminal portion  20506  to a contact element  20508 , a third connector extends from a terminal portion  20510  to a contact element  20512 , a fourth connector extends from a terminal portion  20514  to a contact element  20516 , a fifth connector extends from a terminal portion  20518  to a contact element  20520 , and a sixth connector extends from a terminal portion  20522  to a contact element  20524 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  206   , a perspective view of back of a control module having contact pads is shown. According to the implementation of  FIG.  206   , rather than having contact elements  20302  extending from a rear surface, contact elements  20602  are provided on the rear portion  20306 , and are adapted to make contact with corresponding contact elements that may extend from the power adapter, such as contact elements of  FIG.  207    for example. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  207   , a perspective view of contact elements of a power adapter that are adapted to make an electrical connection to the contact pads of  FIG.  206    is shown. According to one implementation, the power adapter of  FIG.  204    comprises connectors that are flexible when contact is made with the contact elements  20302 . Six connectors are shown, each of which extends from a terminal portion which enables an electrical connection to a portion of the power adapter to a contact element that enables a connection to a contact element  20602 . More particularly, a first connector extends from a terminal portion  20702  to a contact element  20704 , a second connector extends from a terminal portion  20706  to a contact element  20708 , a third connector extends from a terminal portion  20710  to a contact element  20712 , a fourth connector extends from a terminal portion  20714  to a contact element  20716 , a fifth connector extends from a terminal portion  20718  to a contact element  20720 , and a sixth connector extends from a terminal portion  20722  to a contact element  20724 . A tamper resistance element of the power adapter would be moved as a control module is inserted into a recess of a power adapter to enable the connectors of  FIG.  207    to extend from openings of the power adapter and make contact with contact elements  20602 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  208   , a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement  20800  having a pair of spring-loaded latch elements placed near the top of the control module is shown. Power adapter arrangement  20800  comprises a power adapter  20802  having a flange  20804  and an outlet  20806 . A power adapter  20810  comprises latches  20812  and  20814 . A recess  20816  adapted to enable a user to engage the latch  20814  is also shown. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  209   , a perspective view of the control module of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  208    is shown. The latch element  20814  comprises a hinge  20906  extending to a beveled edge  20908  of a flange  20910 . Similarly, the latches  20812  comprises a hinge portion  20912  extending to a beveled edge  20914  of a flange  20916 . The latches  20812  and  20814  comprise spring-loaded latch elements that are movable to release the flanges from corresponding recesses of the power adapter and return to their resting position after the control module is released. The beveled edges enable the power adapter  20810  to be pushed into and secured to the power adapter. The control module also comprises contact elements  20918  that are adapted to be coupled to corresponding contact elements of the power adapter. Guides  20920  are also provided and adapted to engage with corresponding rails  21008  and  21010  as described in reference to  FIG.  210   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  210   , a perspective view of the power adapter of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  208    is shown. The power adapter as shown in  FIG.  210    comprises a housing portion  21002  having sidewalls  21004  that comprise the rails  21008  and  21010  in a recess  21006 . Recesses  21012  are provided on either side to receive the flanges  20910  and  20916 . Openings  21014  are provided to receive contact elements  20918 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  211   , a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement having a pair of spring-loaded latches placed near the bottom of the control module is shown. The power adapter arrangement  21100  comprises a power adapter  21102  having a yoke  21104  and an outlet  21106 . The latches of the power adapter arrangement  21100  are similar to the latch elements of the power adapter  20810 , except that the latch elements are near the bottom of a module  21108 . The module  21108  comprises a latch  21112  and a latch  21114 , which has a recess  21116  for enabling a user to move the latch  21114 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  212   , a perspective view of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  211    having the control module removed is shown. The power adapter arrangement  21100  comprises a power adapter  21102  having a yoke  21104 , an outlet  21106 , and a control module  21108  having a top surface  21210 . The latches  21112  and  21114  comprise spring-loaded latches that are movable to release the flanges from corresponding recesses of the power adapter and return to their resting position after the control module is released. The latch  21114  extends from a hinge  21202  to a beveled edge  21204  of a flange  21206  enable the module  21108  to be pushed into and secured to the power adapter. The control module also comprises contact elements  21212  that are adapted to be coupled to corresponding contact elements of the power adapter. Guides  21208  are also provided and adapted to engage with corresponding rails  21216  and  21217 . The control module as shown in  FIG.  212    comprises guides  21208  on either side that are adapted to receive the rails  21216  and  21217 . Recesses  21218  are provided on either side to receive the flanges  21206 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  213   , a perspective view of another power adapter arrangement having a pair of spring-loaded latch elements placed near the bottom of the control module is shown. The latch elements of control module  21308  are similar to the latch elements of control module  21108 , except that the latch elements are moved upward to release the flange from a corresponding recess of the power adapter, as will be described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  214   . The power adapter arrangement  21300  comprises a power adapter  21302  having a yoke  21304  and an outlet  21306 . A module  21308  comprises latches  21310  and  21312 . The latches are spring loaded and are movable upward to release the control module  21308 .  FIGS.  203 ,  206 ,  208 ,  211  and  213    are examples latches associated with a control module that may comprise a separate spring to enable the latch to return to its normal resting position. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  214   , a perspective view of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  211    having the control module removed is shown. The latch element of the control module  21308  comprises a hinge  21406  that extends to a beveled edge  21408  of a flange  21410 . The latch also comprises a hinge  21416  extending to a beveled edge  21418  of a flange  21420 . The control module also comprises contact elements  21422 , and guides  21424  that are adapted to engage corresponding rails of the power adapter. The power adapter comprises recesses  21430  and  21432  that are adapted to receive the flanges  21410  and  21420 . Rails  21426  and  21428  are provided on the side walls of the recess to receive the guides  21424  on either side of the module  21308 . Recesses  21430  and  21432  are adapted to receive flanges  21410  and  21420 . A housing portion  21434  comprises openings  21436  for receiving the contact elements  21422 . The latches  21310  and  21312  comprise ridges  21402  and  21414  to enable a user to more easily move the latches upward. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  215   , a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter comprising an outlet is shown. The power adapter arrangement  21500  comprises a control module  21502  having contact elements  21504 ,  21506 , and  21508 . The control module  21502  also comprises in actuator  21509  engaging a tamper resistant element of the power adapter  21510 . The actuator  21509  may be received in an opening  21522  to move a tamper resistant element of the power adapter. A yoke  21511  of the power adapter is also provided, and surrounds an outlet  21512 . A latch element  21516  is adapted to be coupled to latch  12115 . A housing portion  21517  comprises openings  21520  for receiving the contact elements of a control module, and openings  21518  for receiving actuators of a control module. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  216   , a rear perspective view of a power adapter  21510  of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  215    is shown. The power adapter comprises screws  21602 ,  21604 ,  21608  and  21610  that are attached to contact elements as will be described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  217   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  217   , a perspective view of contact elements in a housing having an outlet is shown. Housing  21702  is adapted to receive connectors having the contact elements  21504 ,  21506 , and  21508 . More particularly the connector  21704  comprises the contact element  21504 . The connector  21706  comprises the contact element  21506  and the connector  21708  comprises the contact element  21508 . Additional details related to the housing  21702  and connectors are shown in  FIG.  218   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  218   , an expanded view of the elements of  FIG.  217    is shown. The housing  21702  comprises openings  21802 ,  21804 , and  21806  for receiving prongs of a plug. The connector  21704  comprises a terminal portion  21808  adapted to receive a contact element  21504  and extends to a contact element  21810  adapted to receive a terminal of a plug. The connector  21706  comprises a terminal portion  21812  adapted to receive a contact element  21506  and extends to a contact element  21814  adapted to receive a terminal of a plug. The connector  21708  comprises a terminal portion  21816  adapted to receive the contact element  21508  and extends to a contact element  21818  adapter receiver terminal plug. A tamper resistance element  21820  comprises a beveled edge  21822  adapted to receive a prong of a plug to move the tamper resistance element, and an opening  21824  adapted to receive a terminal will plug when the shutter is moved to the open position. A spring  21826  is adapted to retain the tamper resistance element in place until it is moved by a prong of a plug when the plug is inserted into the outlet. A housing  21827  comprises openings  21828  and  21830  for receiving the contact element  21810  and  21818 , respectively. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  219   , a perspective view of elements associated with an outlet of the power adapter of  FIG.  216    is shown. A housing portion  21901  is adapted to receive contact elements associated with the outlet  21512 . A contact element  21902  and a contact element  21904  are associated with the contact element  21906  adapted to receive a prong of a plug, such as a line prong. The contact elements  21902  and  21904  are coupled by a tab  21905  that can be severed to decouple the contact elements  21902  and  21904  to provide for a switched outlet. A contact element  21908  and a contact element  21910  are also coupled by a tab that is adapted to be separated. The contact elements  21908  and  21910  are adapted to be coupled to contact element  21911  that is adapted to receive a prong of a plug, such as a prong that is adapted to receive a neutral voltage for example. A contact element  21912  is coupled to a terminal end  21913  and may be coupled to a contact element adapted to receive a prong of a plug, such as a prong adapted to receive a ground contact. A connector  21916  extends from a terminal end  21914  that is coupled to the contact element  21904  and extends to a contact element  21918 . A connector  21920  extends from a terminal end  21922  to a contact element  21924  and is coupled to the contact element  21910 . A connector  21926  extends from a terminal end  21928  to a contact element  21930 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  220   , an expanded view of the elements associated with an outlet of  FIG.  219    is shown. Openings  22002  that correspond to the openings  21934  of the tamper resistance element  21932  and openings  22004  that correspond to the openings  21936  are shown in  FIG.  220   . A contact element  22005  is adapted to receive a prong of a plug, such as a ground prong and is electrically coupled to the terminal end  22012 . A recess  22006  is adapted to receive a spring  22008  to enable the tamper resistance element  21932  to move and return to a resting state. A terminal end  22210  coupled to the contact element  21904  enables the terminal end  21914  to be electrically coupled to the contact element  21904 . A terminal end  22012  that is coupled to the terminal end  21928  enables the terminal end  21928  to be coupled to the contact element  21912 . A terminal end  22214  coupled to the contact element  21910  enables the terminal end  21922  to be coupled to the contact element  21910 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  221   , a perspective view of a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter comprising a switch is shown. A power adapter arrangement  22100  comprises a control module  22102  having a plurality of actuators  22104  and a plurality of contact elements  22106 . The control module  22102  also comprises an actuator  22108  for engaging a tamper resistance element associated with a power adapter, such as power adapter  22110 . The power adapter  21110  comprises a flange  22111  and a switch  22112  associated with a housing  22113 . A housing portion  22114  below the switch comprises openings  22116  for receiving the actuators  22104  and openings  22118  for receiving the contact elements  22106 . The housing portion  22114  also comprises an opening  22120  for receiving the actuator  22108 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  222   , a rear perspective view of the power adapter of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  221    is shown. The power adapter includes a rear housing  22201 , and a plurality of screw terminals coupled to contact elements of the power adapter, including a first screw  22202 , a second screw  22204 , a third screw  22206 , and a fourth screw  22208 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  223   , a perspective view of elements of a switch of the power adapter of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  221    is shown. The switch  22112  comprises both housing elements and various conductive elements. A first contact element  22302  is adapted to receive the screw  22202 . A second contact element  22304  is adapted to receive the screw  22004 , a third contact element  22306  is adapted to receive screw  22206 , and a fourth contact element  22308  is adapted to receive screw  22208 . A switch contact element  22310  and a plurality of contact elements  22312  are shown. Additional disclosure related to the various electrical components are described in more detail in reference to  FIG.  224   . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  224   , an expanded view of the elements of a switch of the power adapter of the power adapter arrangement of  FIG.  221    is shown. A switch actuator  22401  comprises an actuator  22402  that is adapted to engage the switch contact element  22310 . The housing portion  22213  comprises a raised portion  22404  having a plurality of openings  22406  that are adapted to align with the openings  22412  of the tamper resistant element  22410 . The raised portion  22404  also comprises a plurality of openings  22408  that are adapted to align with the openings  22414  of the tamper resistant element  22410 . The tamper resistant element also comprises an actuator  22416  adapted to engage with the actuator  22108 . A wall  22418  defines a cavity for receiving a spring  22420 . A connector  24222  extends from the contact element  22302  to a terminal end  22424 . A connector  22426  extends from a terminal end  22428  that is adapted to be coupled to the terminal end  22424  and comprises a contact element  22430  of the plurality of contact elements  22312 . A connector  22432  comprises a terminal end  22434  and a contact element  22436 . The switch contact element  22310  comprises a contact element  22438  and extends to a contact element  22430 . A connector  22442  comprises a terminal end  22444  and a contact element  22446 . A connector  22448  comprises a terminal portion  22450  and a contact element  22452 . A connector  22454  extends from a terminal end  22456  to a contact element  22458 . A connector  22460  comprises a terminal end  22462  extending to a contact element  22464 . A connector  22466  comprises the contact element  22308  and includes a terminal end  22468 . A connector  22470  comprises a terminal  22472  and extends to a contact element  22474 . A connector  22476  comprises the contact element  22304  and extends to a terminal portion  22478 . A connector  22480  comprises the contact element  22306  and extends to a terminal end  22482 . The connector  22454  is coupled to the connector  22476 , the connector  22460  is coupled to the connector  22476 , and the connector  22470  is coupled to the connector  22480 . 
     Various methods are described in more detail below and may correspond to various implementations of power adapters, control module, power adapter arrangements, and systems as set forth above. It should be understood that the various methods of a given method may include additional blocks, and additional details related to the methods may be found in reference to figures above that describe various implementations of power adapters, control module, power adapter arrangements, and systems. While some examples of figures describing power adapters, control module, power adapter arrangements, and systems that may implement a given method are provided, it should be understood that a give method may be implemented using other power adapters, control module, power adapter arrangements, and systems. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  225   , a flow chart shows a method of detecting a change in a value provided by a remote control module in a 3-way switching operation. A system for controlling power adapters enabling a 3-way switching operation is provided at a block  22502 . A change in a value from a remote control module in a power adapter in a multi-way switching arrangement is detected at a block  22504 . It is then determined whether the change determined to be valid at a block  22506 . If so, the master changes the dimming value at a block  22508 . If not, the master communicates previous value to all of the remote control modules at a block  22510 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  226   , a flow chart shows a method of changing values associated with the operation of a power adapter arrangement. An initialization is performed at a block  22602 . A control module inserted in a power adapter is configured as a master or a remote at a block  22604 . It is then determined whether a change is valid at a block  22606 . The remote control module may enter an idle state at a block  22608 . A new dimming value may be received from a traveler line at a block  22610 . A new dimming level may be set in memory at a block  22612 . The remote control module may return to idle at a block  22614 . An up or down button of the remote control module may be pressed at a block  22616 . A new dimming level may then be set in memory and new value may be communicated to other control modules at a block  22617 . The remote control module may then return to idle at a block  22618 . 
     An initialization of the master control module may be performed at a block  22619 . The master control module may then enter an idle state at a block  22620 . A dimming value may be received from a remote control module at the master control module at a block  22621 . It is then determined whether the value received is valid at a block  22622 . A dimming value to a load may be changed via a TRIAC at a block  22624 . A previous value may be communicated to remotes at a block  22626 . The master control module may be returned to idle at a block  22628 . 
     Up or down button of the master control module may be pressed at a block  22634 . A new dimming value may be set level in memory, and the new value may be communicated to other control modules at a block  22636 . The dimming value to the load may be changed via TRIAC at a block  22638 . The master control module may return to idle at a block  22640 . 
     A dimming command may be received via wireless connection at a block  22642 . A new dimming level may be set in memory, and the new value may be communicated to other control modules at a block  22644 . The dimming value to the load may be changed via TRIAC at a block  22646 . The master control module may be returned to idle at a block  22648 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  227   , a flow chart shows a method of implementing a control module in a power adapter arrangement having a power adapter comprising a switch. A power adapter having a switch and having a user accessible switch actuator is provided at a block  22702 , wherein the power adapter is adapted to receive a control module. A first contact element enabling a control module to break an electrical connection between a first terminal of a switch and a contact element adapted to receive a line voltage is provided at a block  22704 . A second contact element enabling a control module to break an electrical connection between a second terminal of a switch and a contact element adapted to be coupled to a load is provided at a block  22706 . It is then determined whether a control module is adapted to control an operation of the power adapter (having a switch) coupled to the power adapter at a block  22710 . If so, an electrical connection between first contact element and the contact element adapted to receive a line voltage is maintained, and an electrical connection between the second contact element and the contact element adapted to be coupled to a load is maintained at a block  22712 . If so, the method is ended. 
     Turning now to  228  a flow chart shows the routing of electrical signals having different voltages through a switch of a power adapter. A power adapter having a switch and having a user accessible switch actuator is provided at a block  22802 , wherein the power adapter is adapted to receive a control module. An electrical signal having a first voltage when a control module is inserted into the power adapter having a switch is routed at a block  22804 . It is then determined whether the control module is removed from the power adapter having a switch at a block  22806 . If so, an electrical signal having a second voltage is routed at a block  22808 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  229   , a flow chart shows a method of implementing actuators of a control module to break electrical connections in different types of power adapters. A power adapter arrangement having a first type of a power adapter comprising a switch for switching power to a load and a second type of a power adapter comprising a switch for switching power to a load is implemented at a block  22902 . A control module having plurality of actuators for breaking electrical connections in both the first type of a power adapter and the second type of a power adapter is provided at a block  22904 . A first set of the plurality of actuators are used for breaking electrical connections in the first type of a power adapter at a block  22906 . A second set of the plurality of actuators are used for breaking electrical connections in the second type of a power adapter at a block  22908 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  230   , a flow chart show a method of breaking electrical connections associated with a power adapter based upon a type of power adapter arrangement. A power adapter having a switch and having contact elements adapted to receive an actuator for breaking electrical connections associated with the power adapter is provided at a block  23002 . A control module having a first actuator of a plurality of actuators for breaking an electrical connection between two contact elements of a plurality of contact elements adapted to make electrical connections to a contact element of the control module is provided at a block  23004 . A control module having a second actuator of the plurality of actuators for breaking an electrical connection between contact elements internal to the power adapter is provided at a block  23006 . It is then determined whether the control module controls a switching operation of the power adapter arrangement at a block  23008 . If not, an electrical connection is maintained between the contact elements internal to the power adapter at a block  23010 . If so, an electrical connection between first contact element and the contact element adapted to receive a line voltage is broken, and an electrical connection between the second contact element and the contact element adapted to be coupled to a load is broken at a block  23012 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  231   , a flow chart shows a method of bypassing a switch of a power adapter when using a control module that controls the switching of power to a load. A power adapter having a user accessible actuator for controlling a switch of the power adapter is provided at a block  23102 . A control module is received by the power adapter at a block  23104 , wherein the control module comprises actuators for breaking an electrical connection between contact elements of the power adapter. It is then determined whether the control module controls the switching of power to the load at a block  23106 . If so, the switch in the power adapter is bypassed at a block  23108 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  232   , a flow chart shows a method of implementing active and passive control modules. A system for controlling power adapters comprising outlets, power adapters enabling a single switching operation, and power adapters enabling a 3-way switching operation is provided at a block  23202 . Passive control modules that operate independent of controlling power to a load and active control modules that are adapted to control power to a load are provided at a block  23204 . It is then determined whether the control module is an active control module at a block  23206 . If not, power is provided to the active control module and enables control of the application of power to a load at a block  23208 . If so, power is provided to the passive control module at a block  23210 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  233   , a flow chart shows a method of dimming power to a load in a multi-way dimming arrangement. A system for controlling power adapters comprising outlets, power adapters enabling a single switching operation, and power adapters enabling a multi-way switching operation are provided at a block  23302 . A control module is used to enable the dimming of power to a load in single switch at a block  23304 . A control module is used to enable the dimming of power to a load in a multi-way arrangement at a block  23306 . If so, the control module is used to enable dimming in a load side of a multi-way at a block  23308 . If not, a second control module may be optionally used to enable dimming in another location of the multi-way arrangement at a block  23310 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  234   , a flow chart shows a method of providing tamper resistance in a power adapter arrangement. A power adapter having a recess for receiving a control module is provided at a block  23402 . Contact elements in the power adapter for receiving the control module are provided at a block  23404 . A movable tamper resistance element over the contact elements is provided at a block  23406 . The control module enables moving the tamper resistant element using a projection of the control module at a block  23408 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  235   , a flow chart shows a method of providing an electrical interface in a power adapter arrangement. A first plurality of contact elements comprising a first contact element adapted to receive a voltage, a second contact element adapted to receive a neutral voltage, a third contact element adapted to receive a ground voltage, and a fourth contact element adapted to receive a communication signal is provided at a block  23502 . A recess adapted to receive a control module is provided at a block  23504 . A first terminal of a switch is coupled to receive the voltage at a block  23506 . A communication signal is received at a fifth contact of a second plurality of contact elements associated with the recess at a block  23508 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  236   , another flow chart shows a method of providing an electrical interface in a power adapter arrangement. A first plurality of contact elements comprising a first contact element adapted to receive a line voltage, a second contact element adapted to receive a neutral voltage, a third contact element adapted to receive a ground voltage, and a fourth contact element adapted to a load is provided at a block  23602 . A recess adapted to receive a control module is provided at a block  23604 . A second plurality of contact elements associated with the recess and comprising a fifth contact element coupled to the first contact element, a sixth contact element coupled to the second contact element is provided at a block  23606 . A first terminal of a switch is coupled to receive a second voltage by way of a sixth contact element of the second plurality of contact elements at a block  23608 . A second terminal of the switch is coupled to provide the voltage to a seventh contact element of the second plurality of contact elements at a block  23610 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  237   , a flow chart shows a method of providing an electrical interface in a power adapter arrangement comprising a power adapter having a switch. A first plurality of contact elements comprising a first contact element adapted to receive a voltage and a second contact element adapted to be coupled to a load is provided at a block  23702 . A recess adapted to receive a control module is provided at a block  23704 . A second plurality of contact elements associated with the recess is provided at a block  23706 . A third contact element is coupled to the first contact element at a block  23708 . A fourth contact element is coupled to receive a voltage by way of a control module at a block  23710 . A switch is coupled to receive the voltage at a first terminal by way of the fourth contact element at a block  23712 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  238   , another flow chart shows a method of providing an electrical interface in a power adapter arrangement comprising a power adapter having a switch. A first plurality of contact elements comprising a first contact element adapted to receive a line voltage, a second contact element adapted to be received a neutral voltage, and a third contact element adapted to receive a communication signal is provided at a block  23802 . A recess adapted to receive a control module is provided at a block  23804 . A fourth contact element of a second plurality of contact elements associated with the recess is coupled to the first contact element at a block  23806 . A fifth contact element of a second plurality of contact elements is coupled to the second contact element at a block  23808 . A sixth contact element of a second plurality of contact elements is coupled to the third contact element at a block  23810 . A switch is coupled to receive the line voltage at a first terminal by way of the first contract element at a block  23812 . An output of the switch is coupled to provide a voltage to a seventh contact element of the second plurality of contact elements at a block  23814 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  239   , a flow chart shows a method of coupling elements of a power adapter arrangement. A first plurality of contact elements comprising a first contact element configured to receive a line voltage and a second contact element configured to receive a neutral voltage is provided at a block  23902 . A recess for receiving a control module is provided at a block  23904 . A second plurality of contact elements adapted to receive contact elements of the control module and accessible by way of the recess is provided at a block  23906 . A rear housing portion comprising a shape adapted to receive the second plurality of contact elements is provided at a block  23908 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  240   , another flow chart shows a method of coupling elements of a power adapter arrangement. A first plurality of contact elements including a first contact element adapted to receive a line voltage, a second contact element adapted to receive a neutral voltage, and third contact element adapted to receive a ground voltage is provided at a block  24002 . A second plurality of contact elements coupled to one or more of the first plurality of contact elements is provided at a block  24004 . A conductor is coupled to a fourth contact element of second plurality of contact elements, wherein the conductor is adapted to route power within the control module at a block  24006 . An actuator adapted to engage a tamper resistant element of a power adapter and move the actuator to enable the first plurality of contact elements to make an electrical connection to corresponding contact elements of the power adapter is provided at a block  24008 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  241   , a flow chart shows a method of implementing a power adapter arrangement comprising an actuator. A first plurality of contact elements comprising a first contact element configured to receive a line voltage and a second contact element configured to receive a neutral voltage is provided at a block  24102 . The line voltage is converted to a second signal at a block  24104 . An actuator adapted to engage with a power adapter is provided at a block  24106 . The routing of signals between the power adapter is enabled, by the actuator, at a block  24108 . The power signal is routed to the power adapter by way a third contact element of the first plurality of contact elements at a block  24110 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  242   , another flow chart shows a method of providing an electrical interface in a power adapter arrangement comprising a power adapter having a switch. A first plurality of contact elements of a first contact element a first plurality of contact elements configured to receive a first voltage is provided at a block  24202 . A second contact element of the first contact element a first plurality of contact elements configured to receive a neutral voltage is provided at a block  24204 . A power transmission circuit is coupled to receive the first voltage at a block  24206 . A second voltage is routed to a switch of a power adapter by way of a third contact element at a block  24208 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  243   , a flow chart shows a method of attaching power adapter elements to create an electrical interface. A first plurality of contact elements associated with a power adapter is provided at a block  24302 . A second plurality of contact elements of a control module, wherein the first plurality of contact elements is adapted to be electrically coupled to the second plurality of contact elements is provided at a block  24304 . A housing of the control module and the power adapter that enable the control module and the power adapter and to be attached to one another and create an electrical interface is provided at a block  24306 . Attachment elements to enable the control module to be secured to the power adapter are provided at a block  24308 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  244   , a flow chart shows a method of implementing first and second power adapter arrangements. A first power adapter arrangement comprising a first power adapter having a first switch is provided at a block  24402 . A second power adapter arrangement comprising a second power adapter having a second switch is provided at a block  24404 . The first power adapter is coupled to the second power adapter at a block  24406 . The application of power to a load is controlled by way of a switch of one of the power adapter arrangements at a block  24408 . 
     Turning now to  FIG.  245   , a flow chart shows a method of implementing an in-wall power adapter having a switch and a recess adapted to receive a control module. A first plurality of contact elements comprising a first contact element adapted to receive a line voltage, a second contact element adapted to receive a neutral voltage, a third contact element adapted to receive a ground voltage, and a fourth contact element adapted to receive a communication signal are provided at a block  24502 . A recess adapted to receive a control module is provide at a block  24504 . A first terminal of a switch is coupled to the line voltage at a block  24506 . A second plurality of contact elements associated with the recess and comprising a fifth contact element adapted to receive the communication signal is provided at a block  24508 . 
     The method may further comprise providing a sixth contact element of the first plurality of contact element adapted to be coupled to a load, wherein the first plurality of contact elements further comprises a sixth contact element adapted to be coupled to a load. The method may further comprise providing a second switch adapted to route the line voltage received at a first terminal by way of the first contact element to a load by way of the sixth contact element. The method may further comprise providing a sixth contact element of the second plurality of contact elements adapted to be coupled to receive a ground voltage and a seventh contact element of the second plurality of contact elements adapted to be coupled to receive a neutral voltage. The method may further comprise providing a sixth contact element the second plurality of contact elements adapted to be coupled to a load. The method may further comprise receiving a control module in the recess. The method of  FIG.  245    may be performed by at least some or all of the various implementations of power adapters, control module, power adapter arrangements, and systems as set forth in  FIGS.  107 - 120   , for example. Additional support for the various blocks may be found in the description of these figures. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  246   , a flow chart shows a method of implementing an in-wall power adapter adapted to receive a voltage. A first plurality of contact elements comprising a first contact element adapted to receive a line voltage and a second contact element adapted to be coupled to a load are provided at a block  24602 . A recess adapted to receive a control module wherein a second plurality of contact elements is associated with the recess is provided at a block  24604 . A third contact element is coupled to the first contact element and a fourth contact element is coupled to the second contact element at a block  24606 . A switch coupled to receive the line voltage at a first terminal by way of the first contact element is provided at a block  24608 . A connector is coupled between a second terminal of the switch and the second contact element, wherein the connector is in a closed position when no control module is in the recess at a block  24610 . 
     The method may further comprise coupling a second connector between the first contact element and the first terminal of the switch. The method may further comprise receiving a control module in the recess. The connector may be opened to prevent the line voltage from passing through the connector when the control module is inserted into the recess. The method may further comprise opening a second connector coupled between the second terminal of the switch and a first contact element of the connector when the control module is inserted into the recess. The method may further comprise receiving a control module coupled to the recess, wherein the control module is adapted to prevent the line voltage from passing through the connector when the control module is received in the recess. The method of  FIG.  246    may be performed by at least some or all of the various implementations of power adapters, control module, power adapter arrangements, and systems as set forth in  FIGS.  117 - 120   , for example. Additional support for the various blocks may be found in the description of these figures. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  247   , a flow chart shows a method of configuring an in-wall power adapter to apply a voltage to a load. A recess adapted to receive a control module is provided at a block  24702 . A line voltage is routed to a first plurality of contact elements by way of a first connector having a first contact element adapted to receive a first prong of a plug, a second contact element adapted to receive a contact element of a control module, and a third contact element adapted to receive a wire of a junction box at a block  24704 . A neutral voltage is routed to a second plurality of contact elements by way of a second connector having a fourth contact element adapted to receive a second prong of a plug, a fifth contact element adapted to receive a contact element of a control module, and a sixth contact element adapted to receive a wire of a junction box at a block  24706 . A ground voltage is routed to a third plurality of contact elements by way of a third connector having a seventh contact element adapted to receive a third prong of a plug, an eighth contact element adapted to receive a contact element of a control module, and a ninth contact element adapted to receive a wire of a junction box at a block  24708 . 
     Routing a line voltage to a first plurality of contact elements by way of a first connector may comprise providing a formed metal connector. The formed metal connector may comprise a single piece of metal. The formed metal connector may comprise a first formed metal portion and a second formed metal portion that are electrically connected. Routing a line voltage to a first plurality of contact elements by way of a first connector may comprise providing the first connector having a tenth contact element adapted to receive a wire of a junction box. Routing a line voltage to a first plurality of contact elements by way of a first connector may comprise providing the first connector having a tab coupled between the third contact element and the tenth contact element, wherein the tab is adapted to be severed to provide electrical isolation between the third contact element and the tenth contact element. Routing a neutral voltage to a second plurality of contact elements by way of a second connector may comprise providing the second connector comprises an eleventh contact element to receive a wire of a junction box, and a second tab coupled between the sixth contact element and the eleventh contact element, wherein the tab is adapted to be severed to provide electrical isolation between the sixth contact element and the eleventh contact element. The method of  FIG.  247    may be performed by at least some or all of the various implementations of power adapters, control module, power adapter arrangements, and systems as set forth in  FIGS.  107 - 136   , for example. Additional support for the various blocks may be found in the description of these figures. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  248   , a flow chart shows a method of implementing a control module adapted to be attached to a power adapter. A plurality of contact elements including a first contact element adapted to receive a line voltage and a second contact element adapted to receive a reference voltage are provided at a block  24802 . A switch is coupled to receive the line voltage at a block  24804 . A third contact element is coupled to the switch, wherein the third contact element is adapted to provide the line voltage to a power adapter at a block  24806 . A control circuit is coupled to the switch, wherein the control circuit is adapted to control the state of the switch at a block  24808 . A fourth contact element is coupled to the control circuit at a block  24810 . A signal adapted to be routed to the power adapter by way of the fourth contact element is generated at a block  24812 . 
     The control module may further comprise a signal detector coupled to a fifth contact element and adapted to receive a signal from the power adapter. A change in the signal received from the power adapter may indicate a change in a state of a switch of the power adapter. The reference voltage may comprise one of a ground voltage or a neutral voltage. The control module may further comprise providing an actuator associated with a housing of the control module, wherein the actuator is adapted to engage with a tamper resistance element of the power adapter. The plurality of contact elements further comprises a ground voltage, and the actuator comprises one the plurality of contact elements. The control module may further comprise providing an actuator associated with a housing of the control module, wherein the actuator is adapted to engage with a connector of a power adapter. The method of  FIG.  248    may be performed by at least some or all of the various implementations of power adapters, control module, power adapter arrangements, and systems as set forth in  FIGS.  5 - 89  and  104 - 120   , for example. Additional support for the various blocks may be found in the description of these figures. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  249   , a flow chart shows another method of implementing a control module adapted to be attached to a power adapter. A plurality of contact elements including a first contact element adapted to receive a line voltage and a second contact element adapted to receive a reference voltage is provided at a block  24902 . A first actuator extending from a housing of the control module and adapted to engage with a connector of a power adapter is provided at a block  24904 . A tamper resistance element of a power adapter is engaged by way of a second actuator extending from the housing of the control module when the control module is inserted into a power adapter at a block  24906 . A control circuit adapted to generate a signal is provided at a block  24908 . A third contact element to the control circuit is coupled at a block  24910 . A signal adapted to be routed to a power adapter by way of the third contact element is generated at a block  24912 . A change in a state of a switch of a power adapter is detected at a block  24914 . 
     The method may further comprise providing a third actuator associated with the housing of the control module, wherein the third actuator is adapted to engage with a second connector of the power adapter. The method may further comprise coupling a signal detector to a fourth contact element to receive the signal from the power adapter. The reference voltage may comprise one of a ground voltage and a neutral voltage. The plurality of contact elements may further comprise a fourth contact element adapted to receive a ground voltage, wherein providing the second actuator comprises providing one the plurality of contact elements. The method may further comprise a switch coupled to receive the line voltage. The method further comprise a fourth contact element coupled to the switch and adapted to provide the line voltage to a power adapter. The method of  FIG.  249    may be performed by at least some or all of the various implementations of power adapters, control module, power adapter arrangements, and systems as set forth in  FIGS.  122 - 124 ,  135 - 195 ,  141 - 147 ,  172 - 224   , for example. Additional support for the various blocks may be found in the description of these figures. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  250   , a flow chart show a method of attaching a control module to a power adapter. A front housing is provided at a block  25002 . A latch element is moveably coupled to the front housing, wherein the latch element is adapted to rotate with respect to the front housing at a block  25004 . A rear housing is coupled to the front housing at a block  25006 . Contact elements that extend from the rear housing are provided at a block  25008 . 
     The method may further comprise providing an opening of the latch element that aligns with an opening of the front housing to receive a corresponding latch element of the power adapter. The method may further comprise providing a guide for the latch element for receiving the corresponding latch element of the power adapter. The method may further comprise providing a grip portion that is exposed when the latch element is rotated with respect to the housing. The method may further comprise providing an actuator on the rear housing for engaging a tamper resistant element of a power adapter. The method may further comprise providing a rear housing comprising an actuator for engaging a connector of a power adapter. The method may further comprise coupling the latch element of the control module to a corresponding latch element of the power adapter. The method of  FIG.  250    may be performed by at least some or all of the various implementations of power adapters, control module, power adapter arrangements, and systems as set forth in  FIGS.  121 - 125  and  172 - 224   , for example. Additional support for the various blocks may be found in the description of these figures. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  251   , a flow chart shows a method of routing signal in a 3-way power adapter arrangement. A first power adapter adapted to receive a first control module is provided at a block  25102 , the first power adapter having a first contact element and a first switch. A second power adapter adapted to receive a second control module is provided at a block  25104 , the second power adapter having a second contact element and a second switch. A plurality of signal lines is coupled between the first control module and the second control module at a block  25106 . Communication signals are transferred from the first contact element of the first power adapter to the second contact element of the second power adapter by way of a traveler line of the plurality of signal lines at a block  25108 . 
     The first power adapter comprises a first plurality of contact elements for receiving a line voltage, a neutral voltage and a ground voltage. The first power adapter further comprises a recess for receiving the first control module having a second plurality of contact elements adapted to receive the line voltage, the neutral voltage and the ground signal. The method may further comprise a first switch adapted to provide a signal on the traveler line. The method may further comprise a signal detector coupled to the traveler line. The method may further comprise a second switch coupled to receive the line voltage at a third contact element and route the line voltage to a second contact element. The second power adapter may further comprise an AC/DC circuit adapted to receive the line voltage and generate a DC signal. The method of  FIG.  251    may be performed by at least some or all of the various implementations of power adapters, control module, power adapter arrangements, and systems as set forth in  FIGS.  107 - 120   , for example. Additional support for the various blocks may be found in the description of these figures. 
     Turning now to  FIG.  252   , a flow chart shows another method of routing signal in a 3-way power adapter arrangement. A first power adapter adapted to receive a first control module is provided at a block  25202 , the first power adapter having a first contact element and a first switch. A second power adapter adapted to receive a second control module is provided at a block  25204 , the second power adapter having a second contact element and a second switch. A plurality of signal lines is coupled between the first control module and the second control module at a block  25206 . A line voltage is transferred from the first contact element of the first power adapter to the second contact element of the second power adapter by way of a traveler line of the plurality of signal lines at a block  25208 . 
     The first power adapter may comprise a first plurality of contact elements for receiving a line voltage, a neutral voltage and a ground voltage. The first power adapter may further comprise a recess for receiving the first control module having a second plurality of contact elements adapted to receive a line voltage, a neutral voltage and a ground voltage. The first switch may be adapted to switch the line voltage on the traveler line. The first switch may be adapted to switch the line voltage on the traveler line. The first power adapter may comprise an indicator element indicating when the first power adapter is coupled to receive the line voltage. The first switch and the second switch may comprise single pole, double throw switches. The method of  FIG.  252    may be performed by at least some or all of the various implementations of power adapters, control module, power adapter arrangements, and systems as set forth in  FIGS.  18 - 77   , for example. Additional support for the various blocks may be found in the description of these figures.